diff options
| author | Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu> | 2008-10-13 11:05:51 +0200 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu> | 2008-10-13 11:05:51 +0200 |
| commit | accba5f3965d6a9d1bf7c1e1a7995d17e9d521b6 (patch) | |
| tree | 8fb40782e79472ed882ff2098d4dd295557278ee /Documentation | |
| parent | 6852fd9b86d05063c6ef49d2e12e061cc7f6a105 (diff) | |
| parent | 4480f15b3306f43bbb0310d461142b4e897ca45b (diff) | |
| download | lwn-accba5f3965d6a9d1bf7c1e1a7995d17e9d521b6.tar.gz lwn-accba5f3965d6a9d1bf7c1e1a7995d17e9d521b6.zip | |
Merge branch 'linus' into oprofile-v2
Conflicts:
arch/x86/kernel/apic_32.c
arch/x86/oprofile/nmi_int.c
include/linux/pci_ids.h
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
158 files changed, 4515 insertions, 1488 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX index 6de71308a906..73060819ed99 100644 --- a/Documentation/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX @@ -89,8 +89,6 @@ cciss.txt - info, major/minor #'s for Compaq's SMART Array Controllers. cdrom/ - directory with information on the CD-ROM drivers that Linux has. -cli-sti-removal.txt - - cli()/sti() removal guide. computone.txt - info on Computone Intelliport II/Plus Multiport Serial Driver. connector/ @@ -253,8 +251,6 @@ mono.txt - how to execute Mono-based .NET binaries with the help of BINFMT_MISC. moxa-smartio - file with info on installing/using Moxa multiport serial driver. -mtrr.txt - - how to use PPro Memory Type Range Registers to increase performance. mutex-design.txt - info on the generic mutex subsystem. namespaces/ diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..79a4a75b2d2c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator @@ -0,0 +1,315 @@ +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../state +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + state. This holds the regulator output state. + + This will be one of the following strings: + + 'enabled' + 'disabled' + 'unknown' + + 'enabled' means the regulator output is ON and is supplying + power to the system. + + 'disabled' means the regulator output is OFF and is not + supplying power to the system.. + + 'unknown' means software cannot determine the state. + + NOTE: this field can be used in conjunction with microvolts + and microamps to determine regulator output levels. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../type +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + type. This holds the regulator type. + + This will be one of the following strings: + + 'voltage' + 'current' + 'unknown' + + 'voltage' means the regulator output voltage can be controlled + by software. + + 'current' means the regulator output current limit can be + controlled by software. + + 'unknown' means software cannot control either voltage or + current limit. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../microvolts +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + microvolts. This holds the regulator output voltage setting + measured in microvolts (i.e. E-6 Volts). + + NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator + output voltage level as this value is the same regardless of + whether the regulator is enabled or disabled. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../microamps +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + microamps. This holds the regulator output current limit + setting measured in microamps (i.e. E-6 Amps). + + NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator + output current level as this value is the same regardless of + whether the regulator is enabled or disabled. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../opmode +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + opmode. This holds the regulator operating mode setting. + + The opmode value can be one of the following strings: + + 'fast' + 'normal' + 'idle' + 'standby' + 'unknown' + + The modes are described in include/linux/regulator/regulator.h + + NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator + output operating mode as this value is the same regardless of + whether the regulator is enabled or disabled. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microvolts +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + min_microvolts. This holds the minimum safe working regulator + output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if + the power domain has no min microvolts constraint defined by + platform code. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microvolts +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + max_microvolts. This holds the maximum safe working regulator + output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if + the power domain has no max microvolts constraint defined by + platform code. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microamps +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + min_microamps. This holds the minimum safe working regulator + output current limit setting for this domain measured in + microamps. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if + the power domain has no min microamps constraint defined by + platform code. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microamps +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + max_microamps. This holds the maximum safe working regulator + output current limit setting for this domain measured in + microamps. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if + the power domain has no max microamps constraint defined by + platform code. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../num_users +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + num_users. This holds the number of consumer devices that + have called regulator_enable() on this regulator. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../requested_microamps +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + requested_microamps. This holds the total requested load + current in microamps for this regulator from all its consumer + devices. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../parent +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Some regulator directories will contain a link called parent. + This points to the parent or supply regulator if one exists. + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_microvolts +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_mem_microvolts. This holds the regulator output + voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when + the system is suspended to memory. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if + the power domain has no suspend to memory voltage defined by + platform code. + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_microvolts +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_disk_microvolts. This holds the regulator output + voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when + the system is suspended to disk. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if + the power domain has no suspend to disk voltage defined by + platform code. + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_microvolts +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_standby_microvolts. This holds the regulator output + voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when + the system is suspended to standby. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if + the power domain has no suspend to standby voltage defined by + platform code. + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_mode +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_mem_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode + setting for this domain when the system is suspended to + memory. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if + the power domain has no suspend to memory mode defined by + platform code. + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_mode +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_disk_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode + setting for this domain when the system is suspended to disk. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if + the power domain has no suspend to disk mode defined by + platform code. + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_mode +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_standby_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode + setting for this domain when the system is suspended to + standby. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if + the power domain has no suspend to standby mode defined by + platform code. + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_state +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_mem_state. This holds the regulator operating state + when suspended to memory. + + This will be one of the following strings: + + 'enabled' + 'disabled' + 'not defined' + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_state +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_disk_state. This holds the regulator operating state + when suspended to disk. + + This will be one of the following strings: + + 'enabled' + 'disabled' + 'not defined' + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_state +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_standby_state. This holds the regulator operating + state when suspended to standby. + + This will be one of the following strings: + + 'enabled' + 'disabled' + 'not defined' diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-sgi_uv b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-sgi_uv new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4573fd4b7876 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-sgi_uv @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +What: /sys/firmware/sgi_uv/ +Date: August 2008 +Contact: Russ Anderson <rja@sgi.com> +Description: + The /sys/firmware/sgi_uv directory contains information + about the SGI UV platform. + + Under that directory are a number of files: + + partition_id + coherence_id + + The partition_id entry contains the partition id. + SGI UV systems can be partitioned into multiple physical + machines, which each partition running a unique copy + of the operating system. Each partition will have a unique + partition id. To display the partition id, use the command: + + cat /sys/firmware/sgi_uv/partition_id + + The coherence_id entry contains the coherence id. + A partitioned SGI UV system can have one or more coherence + domain. The coherence id indicates which coherence domain + this partition is in. To display the coherence id, use the + command: + + cat /sys/firmware/sgi_uv/coherence_id diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-gpio b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-gpio new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8aab8092ad35 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-gpio @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +What: /sys/class/gpio/ +Date: July 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.27 +Contact: David Brownell <dbrownell@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: + + As a Kconfig option, individual GPIO signals may be accessed from + userspace. GPIOs are only made available to userspace by an explicit + "export" operation. If a given GPIO is not claimed for use by + kernel code, it may be exported by userspace (and unexported later). + Kernel code may export it for complete or partial access. + + GPIOs are identified as they are inside the kernel, using integers in + the range 0..INT_MAX. See Documentation/gpio.txt for more information. + + /sys/class/gpio + /export ... asks the kernel to export a GPIO to userspace + /unexport ... to return a GPIO to the kernel + /gpioN ... for each exported GPIO #N + /value ... always readable, writes fail for input GPIOs + /direction ... r/w as: in, out (default low); write: high, low + /gpiochipN ... for each gpiochip; #N is its first GPIO + /base ... (r/o) same as N + /label ... (r/o) descriptive, not necessarily unique + /ngpio ... (r/o) number of GPIOs; numbered N to N + (ngpio - 1) + diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt index 80d150458c80..b8e86460046e 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt @@ -298,10 +298,10 @@ recommended that you never use these unless you really know what the cache width is. int -dma_mapping_error(dma_addr_t dma_addr) +dma_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr) int -pci_dma_mapping_error(dma_addr_t dma_addr) +pci_dma_mapping_error(struct pci_dev *hwdev, dma_addr_t dma_addr) In some circumstances dma_map_single and dma_map_page will fail to create a mapping. A driver can check for these errors by testing the returned @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ With scatterlists, you use the resulting mapping like this: int i, count = dma_map_sg(dev, sglist, nents, direction); struct scatterlist *sg; - for (i = 0, sg = sglist; i < count; i++, sg++) { + for_each_sg(sglist, sg, count, i) { hw_address[i] = sg_dma_address(sg); hw_len[i] = sg_dma_len(sg); } diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt b/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt index b463ecd0c7ce..c74fec8c2351 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt @@ -740,7 +740,7 @@ failure can be determined by: dma_addr_t dma_handle; dma_handle = pci_map_single(pdev, addr, size, direction); - if (pci_dma_mapping_error(dma_handle)) { + if (pci_dma_mapping_error(pdev, dma_handle)) { /* * reduce current DMA mapping usage, * delay and try again later or diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile index 0eb0d027eb32..1615350b7b53 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ DOCBOOKS := wanbook.xml z8530book.xml mcabook.xml videobook.xml \ kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml kgdb.xml \ gadget.xml libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml rapidio.xml \ genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml \ - mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml + mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml ### # The build process is as follows (targets): @@ -102,6 +102,13 @@ C-procfs-example = procfs_example.xml C-procfs-example2 = $(addprefix $(obj)/,$(C-procfs-example)) $(obj)/procfs-guide.xml: $(C-procfs-example2) +# List of programs to build +##oops, this is a kernel module::hostprogs-y := procfs_example +obj-m += procfs_example.o + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) + notfoundtemplate = echo "*** You have to install docbook-utils or xmlto ***"; \ exit 1 db2xtemplate = db2TYPE -o $(dir $@) $< diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl index b7b1482f6e04..9d0058e788e5 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl @@ -283,6 +283,7 @@ X!Earch/x86/kernel/mca_32.c <chapter id="security"> <title>Security Framework</title> !Isecurity/security.c +!Esecurity/inode.c </chapter> <chapter id="audit"> @@ -364,6 +365,10 @@ X!Edrivers/pnp/system.c !Eblock/blk-barrier.c !Eblock/blk-tag.c !Iblock/blk-tag.c +!Eblock/blk-integrity.c +!Iblock/blktrace.c +!Iblock/genhd.c +!Eblock/genhd.c </chapter> <chapter id="chrdev"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl index e8acd1f03456..372dec20c8da 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl @@ -98,6 +98,24 @@ "Kernel debugging" select "KGDB: kernel debugging with remote gdb". </para> <para> + It is advised, but not required that you turn on the + CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER kernel option. This option inserts code to + into the compiled executable which saves the frame information in + registers or on the stack at different points which will allow a + debugger such as gdb to more accurately construct stack back traces + while debugging the kernel. + </para> + <para> + If the architecture that you are using supports the kernel option + CONFIG_DEBUG_RODATA, you should consider turning it off. This + option will prevent the use of software breakpoints because it + marks certain regions of the kernel's memory space as read-only. + If kgdb supports it for the architecture you are using, you can + use hardware breakpoints if you desire to run with the + CONFIG_DEBUG_RODATA option turned on, else you need to turn off + this option. + </para> + <para> Next you should choose one of more I/O drivers to interconnect debugging host and debugged target. Early boot debugging requires a KGDB I/O driver that supports early debugging and the driver must be diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl index b651e0a4b1c0..77c3c202991b 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl @@ -145,7 +145,6 @@ usage should require reading the full document. this though and the recommendation to allow only a single interface in STA mode at first! </para> -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_types !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_init_conf !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_conf </chapter> @@ -177,8 +176,7 @@ usage should require reading the full document. <title>functions/definitions</title> !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_status !Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rx_flags -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_control -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_info !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_irqsafe !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status @@ -189,12 +187,11 @@ usage should require reading the full document. !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ctstoself_duration !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_generic_frame_duration !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_hdrlen_from_skb -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_hdrlen +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_hdrlen !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queue !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queue -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_queues -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queues +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues </sect1> </chapter> @@ -230,8 +227,7 @@ usage should require reading the full document. <title>Multiple queues and QoS support</title> <para>TBD</para> !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_params -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_stats_data -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_stats </chapter> <chapter id="AP"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c index 7064084c1c5e..2f3de0fb8365 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c @@ -189,8 +189,6 @@ static int __init init_procfs_example(void) return 0; no_symlink: - remove_proc_entry("tty", example_dir); -no_tty: remove_proc_entry("bar", example_dir); no_bar: remove_proc_entry("foo", example_dir); @@ -206,7 +204,6 @@ out: static void __exit cleanup_procfs_example(void) { remove_proc_entry("jiffies_too", example_dir); - remove_proc_entry("tty", example_dir); remove_proc_entry("bar", example_dir); remove_proc_entry("foo", example_dir); remove_proc_entry("jiffies", example_dir); @@ -222,3 +219,4 @@ module_exit(cleanup_procfs_example); MODULE_AUTHOR("Erik Mouw"); MODULE_DESCRIPTION("procfs examples"); +MODULE_LICENSE("GPL"); diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl index 4acc73240a6d..95bfc12e5439 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ the hardware structures represented here, please consult the Principles of Operation. </para> -!Iinclude/asm-s390/cio.h +!Iarch/s390/include/asm/cio.h </sect1> <sect1 id="ccwdev"> <title>ccw devices</title> @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ ccw device structure. Device drivers must not bypass those functions or strange side effects may happen. </para> -!Iinclude/asm-s390/ccwdev.h +!Iarch/s390/include/asm/ccwdev.h !Edrivers/s390/cio/device.c !Edrivers/s390/cio/device_ops.c </sect1> @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ measurement data which is made available by the channel subsystem for each channel attached device. </para> -!Iinclude/asm-s390/cmb.h +!Iarch/s390/include/asm/cmb.h !Edrivers/s390/cio/cmf.c </sect1> </chapter> @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ </para> <sect1 id="ccwgroupdevices"> <title>ccw group devices</title> -!Iinclude/asm-s390/ccwgroup.h +!Iarch/s390/include/asm/ccwgroup.h !Edrivers/s390/cio/ccwgroup.c </sect1> </chapter> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0c3dc4c69dd1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN" + "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []> + +<book id="sh-drivers"> + <bookinfo> + <title>SuperH Interfaces Guide</title> + + <authorgroup> + <author> + <firstname>Paul</firstname> + <surname>Mundt</surname> + <affiliation> + <address> + <email>lethal@linux-sh.org</email> + </address> + </affiliation> + </author> + </authorgroup> + + <copyright> + <year>2008</year> + <holder>Paul Mundt</holder> + </copyright> + <copyright> + <year>2008</year> + <holder>Renesas Technology Corp.</holder> + </copyright> + + <legalnotice> + <para> + This documentation is free software; you can redistribute + it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public + License version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation. + </para> + + <para> + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be + useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied + warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + See the GNU General Public License for more details. + </para> + + <para> + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public + License along with this program; if not, write to the Free + Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, + MA 02111-1307 USA + </para> + + <para> + For more details see the file COPYING in the source + distribution of Linux. + </para> + </legalnotice> + </bookinfo> + +<toc></toc> + + <chapter id="mm"> + <title>Memory Management</title> + <sect1 id="sh4"> + <title>SH-4</title> + <sect2 id="sq"> + <title>Store Queue API</title> +!Earch/sh/kernel/cpu/sh4/sq.c + </sect2> + </sect1> + <sect1 id="sh5"> + <title>SH-5</title> + <sect2 id="tlb"> + <title>TLB Interfaces</title> +!Iarch/sh/mm/tlb-sh5.c +!Iarch/sh/include/asm/tlb_64.h + </sect2> + </sect1> + </chapter> + <chapter id="clk"> + <title>Clock Framework Extensions</title> +!Iarch/sh/include/asm/clock.h + </chapter> + <chapter id="mach"> + <title>Machine Specific Interfaces</title> + <sect1 id="dreamcast"> + <title>mach-dreamcast</title> +!Iarch/sh/boards/mach-dreamcast/rtc.c + </sect1> + <sect1 id="x3proto"> + <title>mach-x3proto</title> +!Earch/sh/boards/mach-x3proto/ilsel.c + </sect1> + </chapter> + <chapter id="busses"> + <title>Busses</title> + <sect1 id="superhyway"> + <title>SuperHyway</title> +!Edrivers/sh/superhyway/superhyway.c + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="maple"> + <title>Maple</title> +!Edrivers/sh/maple/maple.c + </sect1> + </chapter> +</book> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl index 89817795e668..0bc25949b668 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl @@ -1648,7 +1648,7 @@ static struct video_buffer capture_fb; <chapter id="pubfunctions"> <title>Public Functions Provided</title> -!Edrivers/media/video/videodev.c +!Edrivers/media/video/v4l2-dev.c </chapter> </book> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl index 42c75ba71ba2..a42a8a4c7689 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl @@ -69,12 +69,6 @@ device to be used as both a tty interface and as a synchronous controller is a project for Linux post the 2.4 release </para> - <para> - The support code handles most common card configurations and - supports running both Cisco HDLC and Synchronous PPP. With extra - glue the frame relay and X.25 protocols can also be used with this - driver. - </para> </chapter> <chapter id="Driver_Modes"> @@ -179,35 +173,27 @@ <para> If you wish to use the network interface facilities of the driver, then you need to attach a network device to each channel that is - present and in use. In addition to use the SyncPPP and Cisco HDLC + present and in use. In addition to use the generic HDLC you need to follow some additional plumbing rules. They may seem complex but a look at the example hostess_sv11 driver should reassure you. </para> <para> The network device used for each channel should be pointed to by - the netdevice field of each channel. The dev-> priv field of the + the netdevice field of each channel. The hdlc-> priv field of the network device points to your private data - you will need to be - able to find your ppp device from this. In addition to use the - sync ppp layer the private data must start with a void * pointer - to the syncppp structures. + able to find your private data from this. </para> <para> The way most drivers approach this particular problem is to create a structure holding the Z8530 device definition and - put that and the syncppp pointer into the private field of - the network device. The network device fields of the channels - then point back to the network devices. The ppp_device can also - be put in the private structure conveniently. + put that into the private field of the network device. The + network device fields of the channels then point back to the + network devices. </para> <para> - If you wish to use the synchronous ppp then you need to attach - the syncppp layer to the network device. You should do this before - you register the network device. The - <function>sppp_attach</function> requires that the first void * - pointer in your private data is pointing to an empty struct - ppp_device. The function fills in the initial data for the - ppp/hdlc layer. + If you wish to use the generic HDLC then you need to register + the HDLC device. </para> <para> Before you register your network device you will also need to @@ -314,10 +300,10 @@ buffer in sk_buff format and queues it for transmission. The caller must provide the entire packet with the exception of the bitstuffing and CRC. This is normally done by the caller via - the syncppp interface layer. It returns 0 if the buffer has been - queued and non zero values for queue full. If the function accepts - the buffer it becomes property of the Z8530 layer and the caller - should not free it. + the generic HDLC interface layer. It returns 0 if the buffer has been + queued and non zero values for queue full. If the function accepts + the buffer it becomes property of the Z8530 layer and the caller + should not free it. </para> <para> The function <function>z8530_get_stats</function> returns a pointer diff --git a/Documentation/HOWTO b/Documentation/HOWTO index c2371c5a98f9..48a3955f05fc 100644 --- a/Documentation/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/HOWTO @@ -77,7 +77,8 @@ documentation files are also added which explain how to use the feature. When a kernel change causes the interface that the kernel exposes to userspace to change, it is recommended that you send the information or a patch to the manual pages explaining the change to the manual pages -maintainer at mtk.manpages@gmail.com. +maintainer at mtk.manpages@gmail.com, and CC the list +linux-api@vger.kernel.org. Here is a list of files that are in the kernel source tree that are required reading: diff --git a/Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt b/Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt index c2321903aa09..21bc416d887e 100644 --- a/Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt +++ b/Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ IOVA generation is pretty generic. We used the same technique as vmalloc() but these are not global address spaces, but separate for each domain. Different DMA engines may support different number of domains. -We also allocate gaurd pages with each mapping, so we can attempt to catch +We also allocate guard pages with each mapping, so we can attempt to catch any overflow that might happen. @@ -112,4 +112,4 @@ TBD - For compatibility testing, could use unity map domain for all devices, just provide a 1-1 for all useful memory under a single domain for all devices. -- API for paravirt ops for abstracting functionlity for VMM folks. +- API for paravirt ops for abstracting functionality for VMM folks. diff --git a/Documentation/Makefile b/Documentation/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..94b945733534 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +obj-m := DocBook/ accounting/ auxdisplay/ connector/ \ + filesystems/configfs/ ia64/ networking/ \ + pcmcia/ spi/ video4linux/ vm/ watchdog/src/ diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt index cf5562cbe356..6e253407b3dc 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome! number of updates per grace period. 9. All RCU list-traversal primitives, which include - rcu_dereference(), list_for_each_rcu(), list_for_each_entry_rcu(), + rcu_dereference(), list_for_each_entry_rcu(), list_for_each_continue_rcu(), and list_for_each_safe_rcu(), must be either within an RCU read-side critical section or must be protected by appropriate update-side locks. RCU diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt index 451de2ad8329..4202ad093130 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt @@ -29,9 +29,9 @@ release_referenced() delete() } If this list/array is made lock free using RCU as in changing the -write_lock() in add() and delete() to spin_lock and changing read_lock -in search_and_reference to rcu_read_lock(), the atomic_get in -search_and_reference could potentially hold reference to an element which +write_lock() in add() and delete() to spin_lock() and changing read_lock() +in search_and_reference() to rcu_read_lock(), the atomic_inc() in +search_and_reference() could potentially hold reference to an element which has already been deleted from the list/array. Use atomic_inc_not_zero() in this scenario as follows: @@ -40,20 +40,20 @@ add() search_and_reference() { { alloc_object rcu_read_lock(); ... search_for_element - atomic_set(&el->rc, 1); if (atomic_inc_not_zero(&el->rc)) { - write_lock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock(); + atomic_set(&el->rc, 1); if (!atomic_inc_not_zero(&el->rc)) { + spin_lock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock(); return FAIL; add_element } ... ... - write_unlock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock(); + spin_unlock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock(); } } 3. 4. release_referenced() delete() { { - ... write_lock(&list_lock); + ... spin_lock(&list_lock); if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc)) ... call_rcu(&el->head, el_free); delete_element - ... write_unlock(&list_lock); + ... spin_unlock(&list_lock); } ... if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc)) call_rcu(&el->head, el_free); diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt index e04d643a9f57..96170824a717 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt @@ -786,8 +786,6 @@ RCU pointer/list traversal: list_for_each_entry_rcu hlist_for_each_entry_rcu - list_for_each_rcu (to be deprecated in favor of - list_for_each_entry_rcu) list_for_each_continue_rcu (to be deprecated in favor of new list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu) diff --git a/Documentation/SELinux.txt b/Documentation/SELinux.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..07eae00f3314 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/SELinux.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +If you want to use SELinux, chances are you will want +to use the distro-provided policies, or install the +latest reference policy release from + http://oss.tresys.com/projects/refpolicy + +However, if you want to install a dummy policy for +testing, you can do using 'mdp' provided under +scripts/selinux. Note that this requires the selinux +userspace to be installed - in particular you will +need checkpolicy to compile a kernel, and setfiles and +fixfiles to label the filesystem. + + 1. Compile the kernel with selinux enabled. + 2. Type 'make' to compile mdp. + 3. Make sure that you are not running with + SELinux enabled and a real policy. If + you are, reboot with selinux disabled + before continuing. + 4. Run install_policy.sh: + cd scripts/selinux + sh install_policy.sh + +Step 4 will create a new dummy policy valid for your +kernel, with a single selinux user, role, and type. +It will compile the policy, will set your SELINUXTYPE to +dummy in /etc/selinux/config, install the compiled policy +as 'dummy', and relabel your filesystem. diff --git a/Documentation/SubmitChecklist b/Documentation/SubmitChecklist index da10e0714241..21f0795af20f 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmitChecklist +++ b/Documentation/SubmitChecklist @@ -67,6 +67,8 @@ kernel patches. 19: All new userspace interfaces are documented in Documentation/ABI/. See Documentation/ABI/README for more information. + Patches that change userspace interfaces should be CCed to + linux-api@vger.kernel.org. 20: Check that it all passes `make headers_check'. diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches index 118ca6e9404f..f79ad9ff6031 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches +++ b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches @@ -528,7 +528,33 @@ See more details on the proper patch format in the following references. +16) Sending "git pull" requests (from Linus emails) +Please write the git repo address and branch name alone on the same line +so that I can't even by mistake pull from the wrong branch, and so +that a triple-click just selects the whole thing. + +So the proper format is something along the lines of: + + "Please pull from + + git://jdelvare.pck.nerim.net/jdelvare-2.6 i2c-for-linus + + to get these changes:" + +so that I don't have to hunt-and-peck for the address and inevitably +get it wrong (actually, I've only gotten it wrong a few times, and +checking against the diffstat tells me when I get it wrong, but I'm +just a lot more comfortable when I don't have to "look for" the right +thing to pull, and double-check that I have the right branch-name). + + +Please use "git diff -M --stat --summary" to generate the diffstat: +the -M enables rename detection, and the summary enables a summary of +new/deleted or renamed files. + +With rename detection, the statistics are rather different [...] +because git will notice that a fair number of the changes are renames. ----------------------------------- SECTION 2 - HINTS, TIPS, AND TRICKS diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/Makefile b/Documentation/accounting/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..31929eb875b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/accounting/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := getdelays + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) + +HOSTCFLAGS_getdelays.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c index 3f7755f3963f..cc49400b4af8 100644 --- a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c +++ b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c @@ -201,13 +201,19 @@ void print_delayacct(struct taskstats *t) "RECLAIM %12s%15s\n" " %15llu%15llu\n", "count", "real total", "virtual total", "delay total", - t->cpu_count, t->cpu_run_real_total, t->cpu_run_virtual_total, - t->cpu_delay_total, + (unsigned long long)t->cpu_count, + (unsigned long long)t->cpu_run_real_total, + (unsigned long long)t->cpu_run_virtual_total, + (unsigned long long)t->cpu_delay_total, "count", "delay total", - t->blkio_count, t->blkio_delay_total, - "count", "delay total", t->swapin_count, t->swapin_delay_total, + (unsigned long long)t->blkio_count, + (unsigned long long)t->blkio_delay_total, "count", "delay total", - t->freepages_count, t->freepages_delay_total); + (unsigned long long)t->swapin_count, + (unsigned long long)t->swapin_delay_total, + "count", "delay total", + (unsigned long long)t->freepages_count, + (unsigned long long)t->freepages_delay_total); } void task_context_switch_counts(struct taskstats *t) @@ -215,14 +221,17 @@ void task_context_switch_counts(struct taskstats *t) printf("\n\nTask %15s%15s\n" " %15llu%15llu\n", "voluntary", "nonvoluntary", - t->nvcsw, t->nivcsw); + (unsigned long long)t->nvcsw, (unsigned long long)t->nivcsw); } void print_cgroupstats(struct cgroupstats *c) { printf("sleeping %llu, blocked %llu, running %llu, stopped %llu, " - "uninterruptible %llu\n", c->nr_sleeping, c->nr_io_wait, - c->nr_running, c->nr_stopped, c->nr_uninterruptible); + "uninterruptible %llu\n", (unsigned long long)c->nr_sleeping, + (unsigned long long)c->nr_io_wait, + (unsigned long long)c->nr_running, + (unsigned long long)c->nr_stopped, + (unsigned long long)c->nr_uninterruptible); } diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt b/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt index b988d110db59..e7512c061c15 100644 --- a/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt +++ b/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ This document contains an explanation of the struct taskstats fields. There are three different groups of fields in the struct taskstats: 1) Common and basic accounting fields - If CONFIG_TASKSTATS is set, the taskstats inteface is enabled and + If CONFIG_TASKSTATS is set, the taskstats interface is enabled and the common fields and basic accounting fields are collected for delivery at do_exit() of a task. 2) Delay accounting fields diff --git a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx b/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx index 43edb4ecf27d..72fbcc4fcab0 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx +++ b/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ Linux currently supports the following features on the IXP4xx chips: - Flash access (MTD/JFFS) - I2C through GPIO on IXP42x - GPIO for input/output/interrupts - See include/asm-arm/arch-ixp4xx/platform.h for access functions. + See arch/arm/mach-ixp4xx/include/mach/platform.h for access functions. - Timers (watchdog, OS) The following components of the chips are not supported by Linux and diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Interrupts b/Documentation/arm/Interrupts index 0d3dbf1099bc..f09ab1b90ef1 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Interrupts +++ b/Documentation/arm/Interrupts @@ -138,14 +138,8 @@ So, what's changed? Set active the IRQ edge(s)/level. This replaces the SA1111 INTPOL manipulation, and the set_GPIO_IRQ_edge() - function. Type should be one of the following: - - #define IRQT_NOEDGE (0) - #define IRQT_RISING (__IRQT_RISEDGE) - #define IRQT_FALLING (__IRQT_FALEDGE) - #define IRQT_BOTHEDGE (__IRQT_RISEDGE|__IRQT_FALEDGE) - #define IRQT_LOW (__IRQT_LOWLVL) - #define IRQT_HIGH (__IRQT_HIGHLVL) + function. Type should be one of IRQ_TYPE_xxx defined in + <linux/irq.h> 3. set_GPIO_IRQ_edge() is obsolete, and should be replaced by set_irq_type. @@ -164,7 +158,7 @@ So, what's changed? be re-checked for pending events. (see the Neponset IRQ handler for details). -7. fixup_irq() is gone, as is include/asm-arm/arch-*/irq.h +7. fixup_irq() is gone, as is arch/arm/mach-*/include/mach/irq.h Please note that this will not solve all problems - some of them are hardware based. Mixing level-based and edge-based IRQs on the same diff --git a/Documentation/arm/README b/Documentation/arm/README index 9b9c8226fdc4..d98783fbe0c7 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/README +++ b/Documentation/arm/README @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Machine/Platform support To this end, we now have arch/arm/mach-$(MACHINE) directories which are designed to house the non-driver files for a particular machine (eg, PCI, memory management, architecture definitions etc). For all future - machines, there should be a corresponding include/asm-arm/arch-$(MACHINE) + machines, there should be a corresponding arch/arm/mach-$(MACHINE)/include/mach directory. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Kernel entry (head.S) class typically based around one or more system on a chip devices, and acts as a natural container around the actual implementations. These classes are given directories - arch/arm/mach-<class> and - include/asm-arm/arch-<class> - which contain the source files to + arch/arm/mach-<class> - which contain the source files to/include/mach support the machine class. This directories also contain any machine specific supporting code. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt index 8caea8c237ee..ea7ccfc4b274 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt @@ -13,16 +13,31 @@ Introduction data-sheet/users manual to find out the complete list. +GPIOLIB +------- + + With the event of the GPIOLIB in drivers/gpio, support for some + of the GPIO functions such as reading and writing a pin will + be removed in favour of this common access method. + + Once all the extant drivers have been converted, the functions + listed below will be removed (they may be marked as __deprecated + in the near future). + + - s3c2410_gpio_getpin + - s3c2410_gpio_setpin + + Headers ------- - See include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410/regs-gpio.h for the list + See arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/include/mach/regs-gpio.h for the list of GPIO pins, and the configuration values for them. This - is included by using #include <asm/arch/regs-gpio.h> + is included by using #include <mach/regs-gpio.h> The GPIO management functions are defined in the hardware - header include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410/hardware.h which can be - included by #include <asm/arch/hardware.h> + header arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/include/mach/hardware.h which can be + included by #include <mach/hardware.h> A useful amount of documentation can be found in the hardware header on how the GPIO functions (and others) work. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt index d04e1e30c47f..cff6227b4484 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt @@ -8,9 +8,10 @@ Introduction The Samsung S3C24XX range of ARM9 System-on-Chip CPUs are supported by the 's3c2410' architecture of ARM Linux. Currently the S3C2410, - S3C2412, S3C2413, S3C2440 and S3C2442 devices are supported. + S3C2412, S3C2413, S3C2440, S3C2442 and S3C2443 devices are supported. + + Support for the S3C2400 and S3C24A0 series are in progress. - Support for the S3C2400 series is in progress. Configuration ------------- @@ -36,7 +37,23 @@ Layout in arch/arm/mach-s3c2410 and S3C2440 in arch/arm/mach-s3c2440 Register, kernel and platform data definitions are held in the - include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410 directory. + arch/arm/mach-s3c2410 directory./include/mach + +arch/arm/plat-s3c24xx: + + Files in here are either common to all the s3c24xx family, + or are common to only some of them with names to indicate this + status. The files that are not common to all are generally named + with the initial cpu they support in the series to ensure a short + name without any possibility of confusion with newer devices. + + As an example, initially s3c244x would cover s3c2440 and s3c2442, but + with the s3c2443 which does not share many of the same drivers in + this directory, the name becomes invalid. We stick to s3c2440-<x> + to indicate a driver that is s3c2440 and s3c2442 compatible. + + This does mean that to find the status of any given SoC, a number + of directories may need to be searched. Machines @@ -159,6 +176,17 @@ NAND For more information see Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt +SD/MMC +------ + + The SD/MMC hardware pre S3C2443 is supported in the current + kernel, the driver is drivers/mmc/host/s3cmci.c and supports + 1 and 4 bit SD or MMC cards. + + The SDIO behaviour of this driver has not been fully tested. There is no + current support for hardware SDIO interrupts. + + Serial ------ @@ -178,6 +206,9 @@ GPIO The core contains support for manipulating the GPIO, see the documentation in GPIO.txt in the same directory as this file. + Newer kernels carry GPIOLIB, and support is being moved towards + this with some of the older support in line to be removed. + Clock Management ---------------- diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt index b93b68e2b143..67671eba4231 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ Board Support Platform Data ------------- - See linux/include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410/usb-control.h for the + See arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/include/mach/usb-control.h for the descriptions of the platform device data. An implementation can be found in linux/arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/usb-simtec.c . diff --git a/Documentation/auxdisplay/Makefile b/Documentation/auxdisplay/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..51fe23332c81 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/auxdisplay/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := cfag12864b-example + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) + +HOSTCFLAGS_cfag12864b-example.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include diff --git a/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt b/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt index c23cab13c3d1..72576769e0f4 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt @@ -30,12 +30,18 @@ write_expire (in ms) Similar to read_expire mentioned above, but for writes. -fifo_batch +fifo_batch (number of requests) ---------- -When a read request expires its deadline, we must move some requests from -the sorted io scheduler list to the block device dispatch queue. fifo_batch -controls how many requests we move. +Requests are grouped into ``batches'' of a particular data direction (read or +write) which are serviced in increasing sector order. To limit extra seeking, +deadline expiries are only checked between batches. fifo_batch controls the +maximum number of requests per batch. + +This parameter tunes the balance between per-request latency and aggregate +throughput. When low latency is the primary concern, smaller is better (where +a value of 1 yields first-come first-served behaviour). Increasing fifo_batch +generally improves throughput, at the cost of latency variation. writes_starved (number of dispatches) diff --git a/Documentation/cciss.txt b/Documentation/cciss.txt index 63e59b8847c5..8244c6442faa 100644 --- a/Documentation/cciss.txt +++ b/Documentation/cciss.txt @@ -112,27 +112,18 @@ Hot plug support for SCSI tape drives Hot plugging of SCSI tape drives is supported, with some caveats. The cciss driver must be informed that changes to the SCSI bus -have been made, in addition to and prior to informing the SCSI -mid layer. This may be done via the /proc filesystem. For example: +have been made. This may be done via the /proc filesystem. +For example: echo "rescan" > /proc/scsi/cciss0/1 -This causes the adapter to query the adapter about changes to the -physical SCSI buses and/or fibre channel arbitrated loop and the +This causes the driver to query the adapter about changes to the +physical SCSI buses and/or fibre channel arbitrated loop and the driver to make note of any new or removed sequential access devices or medium changers. The driver will output messages indicating what devices have been added or removed and the controller, bus, target and -lun used to address the device. Once this is done, the SCSI mid layer -can be informed of changes to the virtual SCSI bus which the driver -presents to it in the usual way. For example: - - echo scsi add-single-device 3 2 1 0 > /proc/scsi/scsi - -to add a device on controller 3, bus 2, target 1, lun 0. Note that -the driver makes an effort to preserve the devices positions -in the virtual SCSI bus, so if you are only moving tape drives -around on the same adapter and not adding or removing tape drives -from the adapter, informing the SCSI mid layer may not be necessary. +lun used to address the device. It then notifies the SCSI mid layer +of these changes. Note that the naming convention of the /proc filesystem entries contains a number in addition to the driver name. (E.g. "cciss0" diff --git a/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd b/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd index 91c0dcc6fa5c..2c558cd6c1ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd +++ b/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd @@ -145,8 +145,7 @@ useful for reading photocds. To play an audio CD, you should first unmount and remove any data CDROM. Any of the CDROM player programs should then work (workman, -workbone, cdplayer, etc.). Lacking anything else, you could use the -cdtester program in Documentation/cdrom/sbpcd. +workbone, cdplayer, etc.). On a few drives, you can read digital audio directly using a program such as cdda2wav. The only types of drive which I've heard support diff --git a/Documentation/cli-sti-removal.txt b/Documentation/cli-sti-removal.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 60932b02fcb3..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/cli-sti-removal.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,133 +0,0 @@ - -#### cli()/sti() removal guide, started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com> - - -as of 2.5.28, five popular macros have been removed on SMP, and -are being phased out on UP: - - cli(), sti(), save_flags(flags), save_flags_cli(flags), restore_flags(flags) - -until now it was possible to protect driver code against interrupt -handlers via a cli(), but from now on other, more lightweight methods -have to be used for synchronization, such as spinlocks or semaphores. - -for example, driver code that used to do something like: - - struct driver_data; - - irq_handler (...) - { - .... - driver_data.finish = 1; - driver_data.new_work = 0; - .... - } - - ... - - ioctl_func (...) - { - ... - cli(); - ... - driver_data.finish = 0; - driver_data.new_work = 2; - ... - sti(); - ... - } - -was SMP-correct because the cli() function ensured that no -interrupt handler (amongst them the above irq_handler()) function -would execute while the cli()-ed section is executing. - -but from now on a more direct method of locking has to be used: - - DEFINE_SPINLOCK(driver_lock); - struct driver_data; - - irq_handler (...) - { - unsigned long flags; - .... - spin_lock_irqsave(&driver_lock, flags); - .... - driver_data.finish = 1; - driver_data.new_work = 0; - .... - spin_unlock_irqrestore(&driver_lock, flags); - .... - } - - ... - - ioctl_func (...) - { - ... - spin_lock_irq(&driver_lock); - ... - driver_data.finish = 0; - driver_data.new_work = 2; - ... - spin_unlock_irq(&driver_lock); - ... - } - -the above code has a number of advantages: - -- the locking relation is easier to understand - actual lock usage - pinpoints the critical sections. cli() usage is too opaque. - Easier to understand means it's easier to debug. - -- it's faster, because spinlocks are faster to acquire than the - potentially heavily-used IRQ lock. Furthermore, your driver does - not have to wait eg. for a big heavy SCSI interrupt to finish, - because the driver_lock spinlock is only used by your driver. - cli() on the other hand was used by many drivers, and extended - the critical section to the whole IRQ handler function - creating - serious lock contention. - - -to make the transition easier, we've still kept the cli(), sti(), -save_flags(), save_flags_cli() and restore_flags() macros defined -on UP systems - but their usage will be phased out until 2.6 is -released. - -drivers that want to disable local interrupts (interrupts on the -current CPU), can use the following five macros: - - local_irq_disable(), local_irq_enable(), local_save_flags(flags), - local_irq_save(flags), local_irq_restore(flags) - -but beware, their meaning and semantics are much simpler, far from -that of the old cli(), sti(), save_flags(flags) and restore_flags(flags) -SMP meaning: - - local_irq_disable() => turn local IRQs off - - local_irq_enable() => turn local IRQs on - - local_save_flags(flags) => save the current IRQ state into flags. The - state can be on or off. (on some - architectures there's even more bits in it.) - - local_irq_save(flags) => save the current IRQ state into flags and - disable interrupts. - - local_irq_restore(flags) => restore the IRQ state from flags. - -(local_irq_save can save both irqs on and irqs off state, and -local_irq_restore can restore into both irqs on and irqs off state.) - -another related change is that synchronize_irq() now takes a parameter: -synchronize_irq(irq). This change too has the purpose of making SMP -synchronization more lightweight - this way you can wait for your own -interrupt handler to finish, no need to wait for other IRQ sources. - - -why were these changes done? The main reason was the architectural burden -of maintaining the cli()/sti() interface - it became a real problem. The -new interrupt system is much more streamlined, easier to understand, debug, -and it's also a bit faster - the same happened to it that will happen to -cli()/sti() using drivers once they convert to spinlocks :-) - diff --git a/Documentation/connector/Makefile b/Documentation/connector/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8df1a7285a06 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/connector/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +ifneq ($(CONFIG_CONNECTOR),) +obj-m += cn_test.o +endif + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := ucon + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) + +HOSTCFLAGS_ucon.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt index dcec0564d040..5b0cfa67aff9 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ around '10000' or more. show_sampling_rate_(min|max): the minimum and maximum sampling rates available that you may set 'sampling_rate' to. -up_threshold: defines what the average CPU usaged between the samplings +up_threshold: defines what the average CPU usage between the samplings of 'sampling_rate' needs to be for the kernel to make a decision on whether it should increase the frequency. For example when it is set to its default value of '80' it means that between the checking diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt index ffdb5323df37..3d0b915035b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt @@ -35,11 +35,9 @@ Mailing List ------------ There is a CPU frequency changing CVS commit and general list where you can report bugs, problems or submit patches. To post a message, -send an email to cpufreq@lists.linux.org.uk, to subscribe go to -http://lists.linux.org.uk/mailman/listinfo/cpufreq. Previous post to the -mailing list are available to subscribers at -http://lists.linux.org.uk/mailman/private/cpufreq/. - +send an email to cpufreq@vger.kernel.org, to subscribe go to +http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#cpufreq and follow the +instructions there. Links ----- @@ -50,7 +48,7 @@ how to access the CVS repository: * http://cvs.arm.linux.org.uk/ the CPUFreq Mailing list: -* http://lists.linux.org.uk/mailman/listinfo/cpufreq +* http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#cpufreq Clock and voltage scaling for the SA-1100: * http://www.lartmaker.nl/projects/scaling diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt index ba0aacde94fb..94bbc27ddd4f 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt @@ -59,15 +59,10 @@ apicid values in those tables for disabled apics. In the event BIOS doesn't mark such hot-pluggable cpus as disabled entries, one could use this parameter "additional_cpus=x" to represent those cpus in the cpu_possible_map. -s390 uses the number of cpus it detects at IPL time to also the number of bits -in cpu_possible_map. If it is desired to add additional cpus at a later time -the number should be specified using this option or the possible_cpus option. - possible_cpus=n [s390 only] use this to set hotpluggable cpus. This option sets possible_cpus bits in cpu_possible_map. Thus keeping the numbers of bits set constant even if the machine gets rebooted. - This option overrides additional_cpus. CPU maps and such ----------------- diff --git a/Documentation/cpusets.txt b/Documentation/cpusets.txt index 1f5a924d1e56..47e568a9370a 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpusets.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpusets.txt @@ -635,14 +635,16 @@ prior 'mems' setting, will not be moved. There is an exception to the above. If hotplug functionality is used to remove all the CPUs that are currently assigned to a cpuset, -then the kernel will automatically update the cpus_allowed of all -tasks attached to CPUs in that cpuset to allow all CPUs. When memory -hotplug functionality for removing Memory Nodes is available, a -similar exception is expected to apply there as well. In general, -the kernel prefers to violate cpuset placement, over starving a task -that has had all its allowed CPUs or Memory Nodes taken offline. User -code should reconfigure cpusets to only refer to online CPUs and Memory -Nodes when using hotplug to add or remove such resources. +then all the tasks in that cpuset will be moved to the nearest ancestor +with non-empty cpus. But the moving of some (or all) tasks might fail if +cpuset is bound with another cgroup subsystem which has some restrictions +on task attaching. In this failing case, those tasks will stay +in the original cpuset, and the kernel will automatically update +their cpus_allowed to allow all online CPUs. When memory hotplug +functionality for removing Memory Nodes is available, a similar exception +is expected to apply there as well. In general, the kernel prefers to +violate cpuset placement, over starving a task that has had all +its allowed CPUs or Memory Nodes taken offline. There is a second exception to the above. GFP_ATOMIC requests are kernel internal allocations that must be satisfied, immediately. diff --git a/Documentation/devices.txt b/Documentation/devices.txt index e6244cde26e9..05c80645e4ee 100644 --- a/Documentation/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/devices.txt @@ -2560,9 +2560,6 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated. 96 = /dev/usb/hiddev0 1st USB HID device ... 111 = /dev/usb/hiddev15 16th USB HID device - 112 = /dev/usb/auer0 1st auerswald ISDN device - ... - 127 = /dev/usb/auer15 16th auerswald ISDN device 128 = /dev/usb/brlvgr0 First Braille Voyager device ... 131 = /dev/usb/brlvgr3 Fourth Braille Voyager device diff --git a/Documentation/dontdiff b/Documentation/dontdiff index 881e6dd03aea..27809357da58 100644 --- a/Documentation/dontdiff +++ b/Documentation/dontdiff @@ -5,6 +5,8 @@ *.css *.dvi *.eps +*.fw.gen.S +*.fw *.gif *.grep *.grp diff --git a/Documentation/edac.txt b/Documentation/edac.txt index ced527388001..8eda3fb66416 100644 --- a/Documentation/edac.txt +++ b/Documentation/edac.txt @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ Sdram memory scrubbing rate: 'sdram_scrub_rate' Read/Write attribute file that controls memory scrubbing. The scrubbing - rate is set by writing a minimum bandwith in bytes/sec to the attribute + rate is set by writing a minimum bandwidth in bytes/sec to the attribute file. The rate will be translated to an internal value that gives at least the specified rate. diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index 721c71b86e06..3d2d0c29f027 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -6,6 +6,24 @@ be removed from this file. --------------------------- +What: old static regulatory information and ieee80211_regdom module parameter +When: 2.6.29 +Why: The old regulatory infrastructure has been replaced with a new one + which does not require statically defined regulatory domains. We do + not want to keep static regulatory domains in the kernel due to the + the dynamic nature of regulatory law and localization. We kept around + the old static definitions for the regulatory domains of: + * US + * JP + * EU + and used by default the US when CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY was + set. We also kept around the ieee80211_regdom module parameter in case + some applications were relying on it. Changing regulatory domains + can now be done instead by using nl80211, as is done with iw. +Who: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> + +--------------------------- + What: dev->power.power_state When: July 2007 Why: Broken design for runtime control over driver power states, confusing @@ -19,15 +37,6 @@ Who: Pavel Machek <pavel@suse.cz> --------------------------- -What: old NCR53C9x driver -When: October 2007 -Why: Replaced by the much better esp_scsi driver. Actual low-level - driver can be ported over almost trivially. -Who: David Miller <davem@davemloft.net> - Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de> - ---------------------------- - What: Video4Linux API 1 ioctls and video_decoder.h from Video devices. When: December 2008 Files: include/linux/video_decoder.h include/linux/videodev.h @@ -47,6 +56,30 @@ Who: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org> --------------------------- +What: old tuner-3036 i2c driver +When: 2.6.28 +Why: This driver is for VERY old i2c-over-parallel port teletext receiver + boxes. Rather then spending effort on converting this driver to V4L2, + and since it is extremely unlikely that anyone still uses one of these + devices, it was decided to drop it. +Who: Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl> + Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org> + + --------------------------- + +What: V4L2 dpc7146 driver +When: 2.6.28 +Why: Old driver for the dpc7146 demonstration board that is no longer + relevant. The last time this was tested on actual hardware was + probably around 2002. Since this is a driver for a demonstration + board the decision was made to remove it rather than spending a + lot of effort continually updating this driver to stay in sync + with the latest internal V4L2 or I2C API. +Who: Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl> + Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org> + +--------------------------- + What: PCMCIA control ioctl (needed for pcmcia-cs [cardmgr, cardctl]) When: November 2005 Files: drivers/pcmcia/: pcmcia_ioctl.c @@ -181,19 +214,6 @@ Who: Tejun Heo <htejun@gmail.com> --------------------------- -What: The arch/ppc and include/asm-ppc directories -When: Jun 2008 -Why: The arch/powerpc tree is the merged architecture for ppc32 and ppc64 - platforms. Currently there are efforts underway to port the remaining - arch/ppc platforms to the merged tree. New submissions to the arch/ppc - tree have been frozen with the 2.6.22 kernel release and that tree will - remain in bug-fix only mode until its scheduled removal. Platforms - that are not ported by June 2008 will be removed due to the lack of an - interested maintainer. -Who: linuxppc-dev@ozlabs.org - ---------------------------- - What: i386/x86_64 bzImage symlinks When: April 2010 @@ -230,6 +250,9 @@ What (Why): - xt_mark match revision 0 (superseded by xt_mark match revision 1) + - xt_recent: the old ipt_recent proc dir + (superseded by /proc/net/xt_recent) + When: January 2009 or Linux 2.7.0, whichever comes first Why: Superseded by newer revisions or modules Who: Jan Engelhardt <jengelh@computergmbh.de> @@ -320,3 +343,11 @@ Why: Accounting can now be enabled/disabled without kernel recompilation. controlled by a kernel/module/sysfs/sysctl parameter. Who: Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki <ole@ans.pl> +--------------------------- + +What: ide-scsi (BLK_DEV_IDESCSI) +When: 2.6.29 +Why: The 2.6 kernel supports direct writing to ide CD drives, which + eliminates the need for ide-scsi. The new method is more + efficient in every way. +Who: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp> diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking index 680fb566b928..8362860e21a7 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking @@ -144,8 +144,8 @@ prototypes: void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *); locking rules: may block BKL -get_sb yes yes -kill_sb yes yes +get_sb yes no +kill_sb yes no ->get_sb() returns error or 0 with locked superblock attached to the vfsmount (exclusive on ->s_umount). @@ -409,12 +409,12 @@ ioctl: yes (see below) unlocked_ioctl: no (see below) compat_ioctl: no mmap: no -open: maybe (see below) +open: no flush: no release: no fsync: no (see below) aio_fsync: no -fasync: yes (see below) +fasync: no lock: yes readv: no writev: no @@ -431,13 +431,6 @@ For many filesystems, it is probably safe to acquire the inode semaphore. Note some filesystems (i.e. remote ones) provide no protection for i_size so you will need to use the BKL. -->open() locking is in-transit: big lock partially moved into the methods. -The only exception is ->open() in the instances of file_operations that never -end up in ->i_fop/->proc_fops, i.e. ones that belong to character devices -(chrdev_open() takes lock before replacing ->f_op and calling the secondary -method. As soon as we fix the handling of module reference counters all -instances of ->open() will be called without the BKL. - Note: ext2_release() was *the* source of contention on fs-intensive loads and dropping BKL on ->release() helps to get rid of that (we still grab BKL for cases when we close a file that had been opened r/w, but that diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/Makefile b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..be7ec5e67dbc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +ifneq ($(CONFIG_CONFIGFS_FS),) +obj-m += configfs_example_explicit.o configfs_example_macros.o +endif diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt index 44c97e6accb2..fabcb0e00f25 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt @@ -311,9 +311,20 @@ the subsystem must be ready for it. [An Example] The best example of these basic concepts is the simple_children -subsystem/group and the simple_child item in configfs_example.c It -shows a trivial object displaying and storing an attribute, and a simple -group creating and destroying these children. +subsystem/group and the simple_child item in configfs_example_explicit.c +and configfs_example_macros.c. It shows a trivial object displaying and +storing an attribute, and a simple group creating and destroying these +children. + +The only difference between configfs_example_explicit.c and +configfs_example_macros.c is how the attributes of the childless item +are defined. The childless item has extended attributes, each with +their own show()/store() operation. This follows a convention commonly +used in sysfs. configfs_example_explicit.c creates these attributes +by explicitly defining the structures involved. Conversely +configfs_example_macros.c uses some convenience macros from configfs.h +to define the attributes. These macros are similar to their sysfs +counterparts. [Hierarchy Navigation and the Subsystem Mutex] diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example.c b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c index 039648791701..d428cc9f07f3 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example.c +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c @@ -1,8 +1,10 @@ /* * vim: noexpandtab ts=8 sts=0 sw=8: * - * configfs_example.c - This file is a demonstration module containing - * a number of configfs subsystems. + * configfs_example_explicit.c - This file is a demonstration module + * containing a number of configfs subsystems. It explicitly defines + * each structure without using the helper macros defined in + * configfs.h. * * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or * modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public @@ -281,7 +283,6 @@ static struct config_item *simple_children_make_item(struct config_group *group, if (!simple_child) return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM); - config_item_init_type_name(&simple_child->item, name, &simple_child_type); @@ -302,8 +303,8 @@ static struct configfs_attribute *simple_children_attrs[] = { }; static ssize_t simple_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item, - struct configfs_attribute *attr, - char *page) + struct configfs_attribute *attr, + char *page) { return sprintf(page, "[02-simple-children]\n" @@ -318,7 +319,7 @@ static void simple_children_release(struct config_item *item) } static struct configfs_item_operations simple_children_item_ops = { - .release = simple_children_release, + .release = simple_children_release, .show_attribute = simple_children_attr_show, }; @@ -368,7 +369,6 @@ static struct config_group *group_children_make_group(struct config_group *group if (!simple_children) return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM); - config_group_init_type_name(&simple_children->group, name, &simple_children_type); @@ -387,8 +387,8 @@ static struct configfs_attribute *group_children_attrs[] = { }; static ssize_t group_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item, - struct configfs_attribute *attr, - char *page) + struct configfs_attribute *attr, + char *page) { return sprintf(page, "[03-group-children]\n" diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_macros.c b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_macros.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d8e30a0378aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_macros.c @@ -0,0 +1,448 @@ +/* + * vim: noexpandtab ts=8 sts=0 sw=8: + * + * configfs_example_macros.c - This file is a demonstration module + * containing a number of configfs subsystems. It uses the helper + * macros defined by configfs.h + * + * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or + * modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public + * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either + * version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. + * + * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU + * General Public License for more details. + * + * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public + * License along with this program; if not, write to the + * Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, + * Boston, MA 021110-1307, USA. + * + * Based on sysfs: + * sysfs is Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003 Patrick Mochel + * + * configfs Copyright (C) 2005 Oracle. All rights reserved. + */ + +#include <linux/init.h> +#include <linux/module.h> +#include <linux/slab.h> + +#include <linux/configfs.h> + + + +/* + * 01-childless + * + * This first example is a childless subsystem. It cannot create + * any config_items. It just has attributes. + * + * Note that we are enclosing the configfs_subsystem inside a container. + * This is not necessary if a subsystem has no attributes directly + * on the subsystem. See the next example, 02-simple-children, for + * such a subsystem. + */ + +struct childless { + struct configfs_subsystem subsys; + int showme; + int storeme; +}; + +static inline struct childless *to_childless(struct config_item *item) +{ + return item ? container_of(to_configfs_subsystem(to_config_group(item)), struct childless, subsys) : NULL; +} + +CONFIGFS_ATTR_STRUCT(childless); +#define CHILDLESS_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store) \ +struct childless_attribute childless_attr_##_name = __CONFIGFS_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store) +#define CHILDLESS_ATTR_RO(_name, _show) \ +struct childless_attribute childless_attr_##_name = __CONFIGFS_ATTR_RO(_name, _show); + +static ssize_t childless_showme_read(struct childless *childless, + char *page) +{ + ssize_t pos; + + pos = sprintf(page, "%d\n", childless->showme); + childless->showme++; + + return pos; +} + +static ssize_t childless_storeme_read(struct childless *childless, + char *page) +{ + return sprintf(page, "%d\n", childless->storeme); +} + +static ssize_t childless_storeme_write(struct childless *childless, + const char *page, + size_t count) +{ + unsigned long tmp; + char *p = (char *) page; + + tmp = simple_strtoul(p, &p, 10); + if (!p || (*p && (*p != '\n'))) + return -EINVAL; + + if (tmp > INT_MAX) + return -ERANGE; + + childless->storeme = tmp; + + return count; +} + +static ssize_t childless_description_read(struct childless *childless, + char *page) +{ + return sprintf(page, +"[01-childless]\n" +"\n" +"The childless subsystem is the simplest possible subsystem in\n" +"configfs. It does not support the creation of child config_items.\n" +"It only has a few attributes. In fact, it isn't much different\n" +"than a directory in /proc.\n"); +} + +CHILDLESS_ATTR_RO(showme, childless_showme_read); +CHILDLESS_ATTR(storeme, S_IRUGO | S_IWUSR, childless_storeme_read, + childless_storeme_write); +CHILDLESS_ATTR_RO(description, childless_description_read); + +static struct configfs_attribute *childless_attrs[] = { + &childless_attr_showme.attr, + &childless_attr_storeme.attr, + &childless_attr_description.attr, + NULL, +}; + +CONFIGFS_ATTR_OPS(childless); +static struct configfs_item_operations childless_item_ops = { + .show_attribute = childless_attr_show, + .store_attribute = childless_attr_store, +}; + +static struct config_item_type childless_type = { + .ct_item_ops = &childless_item_ops, + .ct_attrs = childless_attrs, + .ct_owner = THIS_MODULE, +}; + +static struct childless childless_subsys = { + .subsys = { + .su_group = { + .cg_item = { + .ci_namebuf = "01-childless", + .ci_type = &childless_type, + }, + }, + }, +}; + + +/* ----------------------------------------------------------------- */ + +/* + * 02-simple-children + * + * This example merely has a simple one-attribute child. Note that + * there is no extra attribute structure, as the child's attribute is + * known from the get-go. Also, there is no container for the + * subsystem, as it has no attributes of its own. + */ + +struct simple_child { + struct config_item item; + int storeme; +}; + +static inline struct simple_child *to_simple_child(struct config_item *item) +{ + return item ? container_of(item, struct simple_child, item) : NULL; +} + +static struct configfs_attribute simple_child_attr_storeme = { + .ca_owner = THIS_MODULE, + .ca_name = "storeme", + .ca_mode = S_IRUGO | S_IWUSR, +}; + +static struct configfs_attribute *simple_child_attrs[] = { + &simple_child_attr_storeme, + NULL, +}; + +static ssize_t simple_child_attr_show(struct config_item *item, + struct configfs_attribute *attr, + char *page) +{ + ssize_t count; + struct simple_child *simple_child = to_simple_child(item); + + count = sprintf(page, "%d\n", simple_child->storeme); + + return count; +} + +static ssize_t simple_child_attr_store(struct config_item *item, + struct configfs_attribute *attr, + const char *page, size_t count) +{ + struct simple_child *simple_child = to_simple_child(item); + unsigned long tmp; + char *p = (char *) page; + + tmp = simple_strtoul(p, &p, 10); + if (!p || (*p && (*p != '\n'))) + return -EINVAL; + + if (tmp > INT_MAX) + return -ERANGE; + + simple_child->storeme = tmp; + + return count; +} + +static void simple_child_release(struct config_item *item) +{ + kfree(to_simple_child(item)); +} + +static struct configfs_item_operations simple_child_item_ops = { + .release = simple_child_release, + .show_attribute = simple_child_attr_show, + .store_attribute = simple_child_attr_store, +}; + +static struct config_item_type simple_child_type = { + .ct_item_ops = &simple_child_item_ops, + .ct_attrs = simple_child_attrs, + .ct_owner = THIS_MODULE, +}; + + +struct simple_children { + struct config_group group; +}; + +static inline struct simple_children *to_simple_children(struct config_item *item) +{ + return item ? container_of(to_config_group(item), struct simple_children, group) : NULL; +} + +static struct config_item *simple_children_make_item(struct config_group *group, const char *name) +{ + struct simple_child *simple_child; + + simple_child = kzalloc(sizeof(struct simple_child), GFP_KERNEL); + if (!simple_child) + return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM); + + config_item_init_type_name(&simple_child->item, name, + &simple_child_type); + + simple_child->storeme = 0; + + return &simple_child->item; +} + +static struct configfs_attribute simple_children_attr_description = { + .ca_owner = THIS_MODULE, + .ca_name = "description", + .ca_mode = S_IRUGO, +}; + +static struct configfs_attribute *simple_children_attrs[] = { + &simple_children_attr_description, + NULL, +}; + +static ssize_t simple_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item, + struct configfs_attribute *attr, + char *page) +{ + return sprintf(page, +"[02-simple-children]\n" +"\n" +"This subsystem allows the creation of child config_items. These\n" +"items have only one attribute that is readable and writeable.\n"); +} + +static void simple_children_release(struct config_item *item) +{ + kfree(to_simple_children(item)); +} + +static struct configfs_item_operations simple_children_item_ops = { + .release = simple_children_release, + .show_attribute = simple_children_attr_show, +}; + +/* + * Note that, since no extra work is required on ->drop_item(), + * no ->drop_item() is provided. + */ +static struct configfs_group_operations simple_children_group_ops = { + .make_item = simple_children_make_item, +}; + +static struct config_item_type simple_children_type = { + .ct_item_ops = &simple_children_item_ops, + .ct_group_ops = &simple_children_group_ops, + .ct_attrs = simple_children_attrs, + .ct_owner = THIS_MODULE, +}; + +static struct configfs_subsystem simple_children_subsys = { + .su_group = { + .cg_item = { + .ci_namebuf = "02-simple-children", + .ci_type = &simple_children_type, + }, + }, +}; + + +/* ----------------------------------------------------------------- */ + +/* + * 03-group-children + * + * This example reuses the simple_children group from above. However, + * the simple_children group is not the subsystem itself, it is a + * child of the subsystem. Creation of a group in the subsystem creates + * a new simple_children group. That group can then have simple_child + * children of its own. + */ + +static struct config_group *group_children_make_group(struct config_group *group, const char *name) +{ + struct simple_children *simple_children; + + simple_children = kzalloc(sizeof(struct simple_children), + GFP_KERNEL); + if (!simple_children) + return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM); + + config_group_init_type_name(&simple_children->group, name, + &simple_children_type); + + return &simple_children->group; +} + +static struct configfs_attribute group_children_attr_description = { + .ca_owner = THIS_MODULE, + .ca_name = "description", + .ca_mode = S_IRUGO, +}; + +static struct configfs_attribute *group_children_attrs[] = { + &group_children_attr_description, + NULL, +}; + +static ssize_t group_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item, + struct configfs_attribute *attr, + char *page) +{ + return sprintf(page, +"[03-group-children]\n" +"\n" +"This subsystem allows the creation of child config_groups. These\n" +"groups are like the subsystem simple-children.\n"); +} + +static struct configfs_item_operations group_children_item_ops = { + .show_attribute = group_children_attr_show, +}; + +/* + * Note that, since no extra work is required on ->drop_item(), + * no ->drop_item() is provided. + */ +static struct configfs_group_operations group_children_group_ops = { + .make_group = group_children_make_group, +}; + +static struct config_item_type group_children_type = { + .ct_item_ops = &group_children_item_ops, + .ct_group_ops = &group_children_group_ops, + .ct_attrs = group_children_attrs, + .ct_owner = THIS_MODULE, +}; + +static struct configfs_subsystem group_children_subsys = { + .su_group = { + .cg_item = { + .ci_namebuf = "03-group-children", + .ci_type = &group_children_type, + }, + }, +}; + +/* ----------------------------------------------------------------- */ + +/* + * We're now done with our subsystem definitions. + * For convenience in this module, here's a list of them all. It + * allows the init function to easily register them. Most modules + * will only have one subsystem, and will only call register_subsystem + * on it directly. + */ +static struct configfs_subsystem *example_subsys[] = { + &childless_subsys.subsys, + &simple_children_subsys, + &group_children_subsys, + NULL, +}; + +static int __init configfs_example_init(void) +{ + int ret; + int i; + struct configfs_subsystem *subsys; + + for (i = 0; example_subsys[i]; i++) { + subsys = example_subsys[i]; + + config_group_init(&subsys->su_group); + mutex_init(&subsys->su_mutex); + ret = configfs_register_subsystem(subsys); + if (ret) { + printk(KERN_ERR "Error %d while registering subsystem %s\n", + ret, + subsys->su_group.cg_item.ci_namebuf); + goto out_unregister; + } + } + + return 0; + +out_unregister: + for (; i >= 0; i--) { + configfs_unregister_subsystem(example_subsys[i]); + } + + return ret; +} + +static void __exit configfs_example_exit(void) +{ + int i; + + for (i = 0; example_subsys[i]; i++) { + configfs_unregister_subsystem(example_subsys[i]); + } +} + +module_init(configfs_example_init); +module_exit(configfs_example_exit); +MODULE_LICENSE("GPL"); diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 80e193d82e2e..eb154ef36c2a 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -26,9 +26,15 @@ Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/fs/ext2/e2fsprogs.git - - Create a new filesystem using the ext4dev filesystem type: + - Note that it is highly important to install the mke2fs.conf file + that comes with the e2fsprogs 1.41.x sources in /etc/mke2fs.conf. If + you have edited the /etc/mke2fs.conf file installed on your system, + you will need to merge your changes with the version from e2fsprogs + 1.41.x. - # mke2fs -t ext4dev /dev/hda1 + - Create a new filesystem using the ext4 filesystem type: + + # mke2fs -t ext4 /dev/hda1 Or configure an existing ext3 filesystem to support extents and set the test_fs flag to indicate that it's ok for an in-development @@ -41,13 +47,13 @@ Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org # tune2fs -I 256 /dev/hda1 - (Note: we currently do not have tools to convert an ext4dev + (Note: we currently do not have tools to convert an ext4 filesystem back to ext3; so please do not do try this on production filesystems.) - Mounting: - # mount -t ext4dev /dev/hda1 /wherever + # mount -t ext4 /dev/hda1 /wherever - When comparing performance with other filesystems, remember that ext3/4 by default offers higher data integrity guarantees than most. @@ -171,6 +177,11 @@ barrier=<0|1(*)> This enables/disables the use of write barriers in your disks are battery-backed in one way or another, disabling barriers may safely improve performance. +inode_readahead=n This tuning parameter controls the maximum + number of inode table blocks that ext4's inode + table readahead algorithm will pre-read into + the buffer cache. The default value is 32 blocks. + orlov (*) This enables the new Orlov block allocator. It is enabled by default. @@ -212,6 +223,11 @@ errors=remount-ro(*) Remount the filesystem read-only on an error. errors=continue Keep going on a filesystem error. errors=panic Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs. +data_err=ignore(*) Just print an error message if an error occurs + in a file data buffer in ordered mode. +data_err=abort Abort the journal if an error occurs in a file + data buffer in ordered mode. + grpid Give objects the same group ID as their creator. bsdgroups @@ -246,6 +262,7 @@ stripe=n Number of filesystem blocks that mballoc will try delalloc (*) Deferring block allocation until write-out time. nodelalloc Disable delayed allocation. Blocks are allocation when data is copied from user to page cache. + Data Mode ========= There are 3 different data modes: diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1e3defcfe50b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt @@ -0,0 +1,228 @@ +============ +Fiemap Ioctl +============ + +The fiemap ioctl is an efficient method for userspace to get file +extent mappings. Instead of block-by-block mapping (such as bmap), fiemap +returns a list of extents. + + +Request Basics +-------------- + +A fiemap request is encoded within struct fiemap: + +struct fiemap { + __u64 fm_start; /* logical offset (inclusive) at + * which to start mapping (in) */ + __u64 fm_length; /* logical length of mapping which + * userspace cares about (in) */ + __u32 fm_flags; /* FIEMAP_FLAG_* flags for request (in/out) */ + __u32 fm_mapped_extents; /* number of extents that were + * mapped (out) */ + __u32 fm_extent_count; /* size of fm_extents array (in) */ + __u32 fm_reserved; + struct fiemap_extent fm_extents[0]; /* array of mapped extents (out) */ +}; + + +fm_start, and fm_length specify the logical range within the file +which the process would like mappings for. Extents returned mirror +those on disk - that is, the logical offset of the 1st returned extent +may start before fm_start, and the range covered by the last returned +extent may end after fm_length. All offsets and lengths are in bytes. + +Certain flags to modify the way in which mappings are looked up can be +set in fm_flags. If the kernel doesn't understand some particular +flags, it will return EBADR and the contents of fm_flags will contain +the set of flags which caused the error. If the kernel is compatible +with all flags passed, the contents of fm_flags will be unmodified. +It is up to userspace to determine whether rejection of a particular +flag is fatal to it's operation. This scheme is intended to allow the +fiemap interface to grow in the future but without losing +compatibility with old software. + +fm_extent_count specifies the number of elements in the fm_extents[] array +that can be used to return extents. If fm_extent_count is zero, then the +fm_extents[] array is ignored (no extents will be returned), and the +fm_mapped_extents count will hold the number of extents needed in +fm_extents[] to hold the file's current mapping. Note that there is +nothing to prevent the file from changing between calls to FIEMAP. + +The following flags can be set in fm_flags: + +* FIEMAP_FLAG_SYNC +If this flag is set, the kernel will sync the file before mapping extents. + +* FIEMAP_FLAG_XATTR +If this flag is set, the extents returned will describe the inodes +extended attribute lookup tree, instead of it's data tree. + + +Extent Mapping +-------------- + +Extent information is returned within the embedded fm_extents array +which userspace must allocate along with the fiemap structure. The +number of elements in the fiemap_extents[] array should be passed via +fm_extent_count. The number of extents mapped by kernel will be +returned via fm_mapped_extents. If the number of fiemap_extents +allocated is less than would be required to map the requested range, +the maximum number of extents that can be mapped in the fm_extent[] +array will be returned and fm_mapped_extents will be equal to +fm_extent_count. In that case, the last extent in the array will not +complete the requested range and will not have the FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST +flag set (see the next section on extent flags). + +Each extent is described by a single fiemap_extent structure as +returned in fm_extents. + +struct fiemap_extent { + __u64 fe_logical; /* logical offset in bytes for the start of + * the extent */ + __u64 fe_physical; /* physical offset in bytes for the start + * of the extent */ + __u64 fe_length; /* length in bytes for the extent */ + __u64 fe_reserved64[2]; + __u32 fe_flags; /* FIEMAP_EXTENT_* flags for this extent */ + __u32 fe_reserved[3]; +}; + +All offsets and lengths are in bytes and mirror those on disk. It is valid +for an extents logical offset to start before the request or it's logical +length to extend past the request. Unless FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED is +returned, fe_logical, fe_physical, and fe_length will be aligned to the +block size of the file system. With the exception of extents flagged as +FIEMAP_EXTENT_MERGED, adjacent extents will not be merged. + +The fe_flags field contains flags which describe the extent returned. +A special flag, FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST is always set on the last extent in +the file so that the process making fiemap calls can determine when no +more extents are available, without having to call the ioctl again. + +Some flags are intentionally vague and will always be set in the +presence of other more specific flags. This way a program looking for +a general property does not have to know all existing and future flags +which imply that property. + +For example, if FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_INLINE or FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_TAIL +are set, FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED will also be set. A program looking +for inline or tail-packed data can key on the specific flag. Software +which simply cares not to try operating on non-aligned extents +however, can just key on FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED, and not have to +worry about all present and future flags which might imply unaligned +data. Note that the opposite is not true - it would be valid for +FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED to appear alone. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST +This is the last extent in the file. A mapping attempt past this +extent will return nothing. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNKNOWN +The location of this extent is currently unknown. This may indicate +the data is stored on an inaccessible volume or that no storage has +been allocated for the file yet. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DELALLOC + - This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNKNOWN. +Delayed allocation - while there is data for this extent, it's +physical location has not been allocated yet. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED +This extent does not consist of plain filesystem blocks but is +encoded (e.g. encrypted or compressed). Reading the data in this +extent via I/O to the block device will have undefined results. + +Note that it is *always* undefined to try to update the data +in-place by writing to the indicated location without the +assistance of the filesystem, or to access the data using the +information returned by the FIEMAP interface while the filesystem +is mounted. In other words, user applications may only read the +extent data via I/O to the block device while the filesystem is +unmounted, and then only if the FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED flag is +clear; user applications must not try reading or writing to the +filesystem via the block device under any other circumstances. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_ENCRYPTED + - This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED +The data in this extent has been encrypted by the file system. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED +Extent offsets and length are not guaranteed to be block aligned. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_INLINE + This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED +Data is located within a meta data block. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_TAIL + This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED +Data is packed into a block with data from other files. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNWRITTEN +Unwritten extent - the extent is allocated but it's data has not been +initialized. This indicates the extent's data will be all zero if read +through the filesystem but the contents are undefined if read directly from +the device. + +* FIEMAP_EXTENT_MERGED +This will be set when a file does not support extents, i.e., it uses a block +based addressing scheme. Since returning an extent for each block back to +userspace would be highly inefficient, the kernel will try to merge most +adjacent blocks into 'extents'. + + +VFS -> File System Implementation +--------------------------------- + +File systems wishing to support fiemap must implement a ->fiemap callback on +their inode_operations structure. The fs ->fiemap call is responsible for +defining it's set of supported fiemap flags, and calling a helper function on +each discovered extent: + +struct inode_operations { + ... + + int (*fiemap)(struct inode *, struct fiemap_extent_info *, u64 start, + u64 len); + +->fiemap is passed struct fiemap_extent_info which describes the +fiemap request: + +struct fiemap_extent_info { + unsigned int fi_flags; /* Flags as passed from user */ + unsigned int fi_extents_mapped; /* Number of mapped extents */ + unsigned int fi_extents_max; /* Size of fiemap_extent array */ + struct fiemap_extent *fi_extents_start; /* Start of fiemap_extent array */ +}; + +It is intended that the file system should not need to access any of this +structure directly. + + +Flag checking should be done at the beginning of the ->fiemap callback via the +fiemap_check_flags() helper: + +int fiemap_check_flags(struct fiemap_extent_info *fieinfo, u32 fs_flags); + +The struct fieinfo should be passed in as recieved from ioctl_fiemap(). The +set of fiemap flags which the fs understands should be passed via fs_flags. If +fiemap_check_flags finds invalid user flags, it will place the bad values in +fieinfo->fi_flags and return -EBADR. If the file system gets -EBADR, from +fiemap_check_flags(), it should immediately exit, returning that error back to +ioctl_fiemap(). + + +For each extent in the request range, the file system should call +the helper function, fiemap_fill_next_extent(): + +int fiemap_fill_next_extent(struct fiemap_extent_info *info, u64 logical, + u64 phys, u64 len, u32 flags, u32 dev); + +fiemap_fill_next_extent() will use the passed values to populate the +next free extent in the fm_extents array. 'General' extent flags will +automatically be set from specific flags on behalf of the calling file +system so that the userspace API is not broken. + +fiemap_fill_next_extent() returns 0 on success, and 1 when the +user-supplied fm_extents array is full. If an error is encountered +while copying the extent to user memory, -EFAULT will be returned. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt index e79ee2db183a..ac2a261c5f7d 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Web site ======== There is plenty of additional information on the linux-ntfs web site -at http://linux-ntfs.sourceforge.net/ +at http://www.linux-ntfs.org/ The web site has a lot of additional information, such as a comprehensive FAQ, documentation on the NTFS on-disk format, information on the Linux-NTFS @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ And you would know that /dev/hda2 has a size of 37768814 - 4209030 + 1 = For Win2k and later dynamic disks, you can for example use the ldminfo utility which is part of the Linux LDM tools (the latest version at the time of writing is linux-ldm-0.0.8.tar.bz2). You can download it from: - http://linux-ntfs.sourceforge.net/downloads.html + http://www.linux-ntfs.org/ Simply extract the downloaded archive (tar xvjf linux-ldm-0.0.8.tar.bz2), go into it (cd linux-ldm-0.0.8) and change to the test directory (cd test). You will find the precompiled (i386) ldminfo utility there. NOTE: You will not be diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/omfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/omfs.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1d0d41ff5c65 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/omfs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +Optimized MPEG Filesystem (OMFS) + +Overview +======== + +OMFS is a filesystem created by SonicBlue for use in the ReplayTV DVR +and Rio Karma MP3 player. The filesystem is extent-based, utilizing +block sizes from 2k to 8k, with hash-based directories. This +filesystem driver may be used to read and write disks from these +devices. + +Note, it is not recommended that this FS be used in place of a general +filesystem for your own streaming media device. Native Linux filesystems +will likely perform better. + +More information is available at: + + http://linux-karma.sf.net/ + +Various utilities, including mkomfs and omfsck, are included with +omfsprogs, available at: + + http://bobcopeland.com/karma/ + +Instructions are included in its README. + +Options +======= + +OMFS supports the following mount-time options: + + uid=n - make all files owned by specified user + gid=n - make all files owned by specified group + umask=xxx - set permission umask to xxx + fmask=xxx - set umask to xxx for files + dmask=xxx - set umask to xxx for directories + +Disk format +=========== + +OMFS discriminates between "sysblocks" and normal data blocks. The sysblock +group consists of super block information, file metadata, directory structures, +and extents. Each sysblock has a header containing CRCs of the entire +sysblock, and may be mirrored in successive blocks on the disk. A sysblock may +have a smaller size than a data block, but since they are both addressed by the +same 64-bit block number, any remaining space in the smaller sysblock is +unused. + +Sysblock header information: + +struct omfs_header { + __be64 h_self; /* FS block where this is located */ + __be32 h_body_size; /* size of useful data after header */ + __be16 h_crc; /* crc-ccitt of body_size bytes */ + char h_fill1[2]; + u8 h_version; /* version, always 1 */ + char h_type; /* OMFS_INODE_X */ + u8 h_magic; /* OMFS_IMAGIC */ + u8 h_check_xor; /* XOR of header bytes before this */ + __be32 h_fill2; +}; + +Files and directories are both represented by omfs_inode: + +struct omfs_inode { + struct omfs_header i_head; /* header */ + __be64 i_parent; /* parent containing this inode */ + __be64 i_sibling; /* next inode in hash bucket */ + __be64 i_ctime; /* ctime, in milliseconds */ + char i_fill1[35]; + char i_type; /* OMFS_[DIR,FILE] */ + __be32 i_fill2; + char i_fill3[64]; + char i_name[OMFS_NAMELEN]; /* filename */ + __be64 i_size; /* size of file, in bytes */ +}; + +Directories in OMFS are implemented as a large hash table. Filenames are +hashed then prepended into the bucket list beginning at OMFS_DIR_START. +Lookup requires hashing the filename, then seeking across i_sibling pointers +until a match is found on i_name. Empty buckets are represented by block +pointers with all-1s (~0). + +A file is an omfs_inode structure followed by an extent table beginning at +OMFS_EXTENT_START: + +struct omfs_extent_entry { + __be64 e_cluster; /* start location of a set of blocks */ + __be64 e_blocks; /* number of blocks after e_cluster */ +}; + +struct omfs_extent { + __be64 e_next; /* next extent table location */ + __be32 e_extent_count; /* total # extents in this table */ + __be32 e_fill; + struct omfs_extent_entry e_entry; /* start of extent entries */ +}; + +Each extent holds the block offset followed by number of blocks allocated to +the extent. The final extent in each table is a terminator with e_cluster +being ~0 and e_blocks being ones'-complement of the total number of blocks +in the table. + +If this table overflows, a continuation inode is written and pointed to by +e_next. These have a header but lack the rest of the inode structure. + diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index 8c6384bdfed4..d831d24d2a6c 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -923,45 +923,44 @@ CPUs. The "procs_blocked" line gives the number of processes currently blocked, waiting for I/O to complete. + 1.9 Ext4 file system parameters ------------------------------ -Ext4 file system have one directory per partition under /proc/fs/ext4/ -# ls /proc/fs/ext4/hdc/ -group_prealloc max_to_scan mb_groups mb_history min_to_scan order2_req -stats stream_req - -mb_groups: -This file gives the details of mutiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks - -mb_history: -Multiblock allocation history. - -stats: -This file indicate whether the multiblock allocator should start collecting -statistics. The statistics are shown during unmount -group_prealloc: -The multiblock allocator normalize the block allocation request to -group_prealloc filesystem blocks if we don't have strip value set. -The stripe value can be specified at mount time or during mke2fs. +Information about mounted ext4 file systems can be found in +/proc/fs/ext4. Each mounted filesystem will have a directory in +/proc/fs/ext4 based on its device name (i.e., /proc/fs/ext4/hdc or +/proc/fs/ext4/dm-0). The files in each per-device directory are shown +in Table 1-10, below. -max_to_scan: -How long multiblock allocator can look for a best extent (in found extents) - -min_to_scan: -How long multiblock allocator must look for a best extent - -order2_req: -Multiblock allocator use 2^N search using buddies only for requests greater -than or equal to order2_req. The request size is specfied in file system -blocks. A value of 2 indicate only if the requests are greater than or equal -to 4 blocks. +Table 1-10: Files in /proc/fs/ext4/<devname> +.............................................................................. + File Content + mb_groups details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks + mb_history multiblock allocation history + stats controls whether the multiblock allocator should start + collecting statistics, which are shown during the unmount + group_prealloc the multiblock allocator will round up allocation + requests to a multiple of this tuning parameter if the + stripe size is not set in the ext4 superblock + max_to_scan The maximum number of extents the multiblock allocator + will search to find the best extent + min_to_scan The minimum number of extents the multiblock allocator + will search to find the best extent + order2_req Tuning parameter which controls the minimum size for + requests (as a power of 2) where the buddy cache is + used + stream_req Files which have fewer blocks than this tunable + parameter will have their blocks allocated out of a + block group specific preallocation pool, so that small + files are packed closely together. Each large file + will have its blocks allocated out of its own unique + preallocation pool. +inode_readahead Tuning parameter which controls the maximum number of + inode table blocks that ext4's inode table readahead + algorithm will pre-read into the buffer cache +.............................................................................. -stream_req: -Files smaller than stream_req are served by the stream allocator, whose -purpose is to pack requests as close each to other as possible to -produce smooth I/O traffic. Avalue of 16 indicate that file smaller than 16 -filesystem block size will use group based preallocation. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Summary @@ -1339,6 +1338,25 @@ Enables/Disables the protection of the per-process proc entries "maps" and "smaps". When enabled, the contents of these files are visible only to readers that are allowed to ptrace() the given process. +msgmni +------ + +Maximum number of message queue ids on the system. +This value scales to the amount of lowmem. It is automatically recomputed +upon memory add/remove or ipc namespace creation/removal. +When a value is written into this file, msgmni's value becomes fixed, i.e. it +is not recomputed anymore when one of the above events occurs. +Use auto_msgmni to change this behavior. + +auto_msgmni +----------- + +Enables/Disables automatic recomputing of msgmni upon memory add/remove or +upon ipc namespace creation/removal (see the msgmni description above). +Echoing "1" into this file enables msgmni automatic recomputing. +Echoing "0" turns it off. +auto_msgmni default value is 1. + 2.4 /proc/sys/vm - The virtual memory subsystem ----------------------------------------------- @@ -1474,7 +1492,7 @@ used because pages_free(1355) is smaller than watermark + protection[2] normal page requirement. If requirement is DMA zone(index=0), protection[0] (=0) is used. -zone[i]'s protection[j] is calculated by following exprssion. +zone[i]'s protection[j] is calculated by following expression. (i < j): zone[i]->protection[j] @@ -2394,6 +2412,8 @@ The following 4 memory types are supported: - (bit 1) anonymous shared memory - (bit 2) file-backed private memory - (bit 3) file-backed shared memory + - (bit 4) ELF header pages in file-backed private memory areas (it is + effective only if the bit 2 is cleared) Note that MMIO pages such as frame buffer are never dumped and vDSO pages are always dumped regardless of the bitmask status. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/quota.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/quota.txt index a590c4093eff..5e8de25bf0f1 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/quota.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/quota.txt @@ -3,14 +3,14 @@ Quota subsystem =============== Quota subsystem allows system administrator to set limits on used space and -number of used inodes (inode is a filesystem structure which is associated -with each file or directory) for users and/or groups. For both used space and -number of used inodes there are actually two limits. The first one is called -softlimit and the second one hardlimit. An user can never exceed a hardlimit -for any resource. User is allowed to exceed softlimit but only for limited -period of time. This period is called "grace period" or "grace time". When -grace time is over, user is not able to allocate more space/inodes until he -frees enough of them to get below softlimit. +number of used inodes (inode is a filesystem structure which is associated with +each file or directory) for users and/or groups. For both used space and number +of used inodes there are actually two limits. The first one is called softlimit +and the second one hardlimit. An user can never exceed a hardlimit for any +resource (unless he has CAP_SYS_RESOURCE capability). User is allowed to exceed +softlimit but only for limited period of time. This period is called "grace +period" or "grace time". When grace time is over, user is not able to allocate +more space/inodes until he frees enough of them to get below softlimit. Quota limits (and amount of grace time) are set independently for each filesystem. @@ -53,6 +53,12 @@ in parentheses): QUOTA_NL_BSOFTLONGWARN - space (block) softlimit is exceeded longer than given grace period. QUOTA_NL_BSOFTWARN - space (block) softlimit + - four warnings are also defined for the event when user stops + exceeding some limit: + QUOTA_NL_IHARDBELOW - inode hardlimit + QUOTA_NL_ISOFTBELOW - inode softlimit + QUOTA_NL_BHARDBELOW - space (block) hardlimit + QUOTA_NL_BSOFTBELOW - space (block) softlimit QUOTA_NL_A_DEV_MAJOR (u32) - major number of a device with the affected filesystem QUOTA_NL_A_DEV_MINOR (u32) diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt index 094f2d2f38b1..510b722667ac 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt @@ -294,6 +294,16 @@ user-defined data with a channel, and is immediately available (including in create_buf_file()) via chan->private_data or buf->chan->private_data. +Buffer-only channels +-------------------- + +These channels have no files associated and can be created with +relay_open(NULL, NULL, ...). Such channels are useful in scenarios such +as when doing early tracing in the kernel, before the VFS is up. In these +cases, one may open a buffer-only channel and then call +relay_late_setup_files() when the kernel is ready to handle files, +to expose the buffered data to the userspace. + Channel 'modes' --------------- diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt index 540e9e7f59c5..6a0d70a22f05 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Similarly to JFFS2, UBIFS supports on-the-flight compression which makes it possible to fit quite a lot of data to the flash. Similarly to JFFS2, UBIFS is tolerant of unclean reboots and power-cuts. -It does not need stuff like ckfs.ext2. UBIFS automatically replays its +It does not need stuff like fsck.ext2. UBIFS automatically replays its journal and recovers from crashes, ensuring that the on-flash data structures are consistent. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index b7522c6cbae3..c4d348dabe94 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ struct file_system_type { The get_sb() method has the following arguments: - struct file_system_type *fs_type: decribes the filesystem, partly initialized + struct file_system_type *fs_type: describes the filesystem, partly initialized by the specific filesystem code int flags: mount flags @@ -895,9 +895,9 @@ struct dentry_operations { iput() yourself d_dname: called when the pathname of a dentry should be generated. - Usefull for some pseudo filesystems (sockfs, pipefs, ...) to delay + Useful for some pseudo filesystems (sockfs, pipefs, ...) to delay pathname generation. (Instead of doing it when dentry is created, - its done only when the path is needed.). Real filesystems probably + it's done only when the path is needed.). Real filesystems probably dont want to use it, because their dentries are present in global dcache hash, so their hash should be an invariant. As no lock is held, d_dname() should not try to modify the dentry itself, unless diff --git a/Documentation/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/ftrace.txt index f218f616ff6b..d330fe3103da 100644 --- a/Documentation/ftrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/ftrace.txt @@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Copyright 2008 Red Hat Inc. Author: Steven Rostedt <srostedt@redhat.com> License: The GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 + (dual licensed under the GPL v2) Reviewers: Elias Oltmanns, Randy Dunlap, Andrew Morton, John Kacur, and David Teigland. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7473 b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7473 index 2126de34c711..1cbf671822e2 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7473 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7473 @@ -14,14 +14,14 @@ Description This driver implements support for the Analog Devices ADT7473 chip family. -The LM85 uses the 2-wire interface compatible with the SMBUS 2.0 +The ADT7473 uses the 2-wire interface compatible with the SMBUS 2.0 specification. Using an analog to digital converter it measures three (3) -temperatures and two (2) voltages. It has three (3) 16-bit counters for +temperatures and two (2) voltages. It has four (4) 16-bit counters for measuring fan speed. There are three (3) PWM outputs that can be used to control fan speed. A sophisticated control system for the PWM outputs is designed into the -LM85 that allows fan speed to be adjusted automatically based on any of the +ADT7473 that allows fan speed to be adjusted automatically based on any of the three temperature sensors. Each PWM output is individually adjustable and programmable. Once configured, the ADT7473 will adjust the PWM outputs in response to the measured temperatures without further host intervention. @@ -46,14 +46,6 @@ from the raw value to get the temperature value. The Analog Devices datasheet is very detailed and describes a procedure for determining an optimal configuration for the automatic PWM control. -Hardware Configurations ------------------------ - -The ADT7473 chips have an optional SMBALERT output that can be used to -signal the chipset in case a limit is exceeded or the temperature sensors -fail. Individual sensor interrupts can be masked so they won't trigger -SMBALERT. The SMBALERT output if configured replaces the PWM2 function. - Configuration Notes ------------------- @@ -61,8 +53,8 @@ Besides standard interfaces driver adds the following: * PWM Control -* pwm#_auto_point1_pwm and pwm#_auto_point1_temp and -* pwm#_auto_point2_pwm and pwm#_auto_point2_temp - +* pwm#_auto_point1_pwm and temp#_auto_point1_temp and +* pwm#_auto_point2_pwm and temp#_auto_point2_temp - point1: Set the pwm speed at a lower temperature bound. point2: Set the pwm speed at a higher temperature bound. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 b/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 index 8f446070e64a..001d2e70bc11 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 @@ -10,6 +10,10 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'sch311x' Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super-I/O config space Datasheet: http://www.nuhorizons.com/FeaturedProducts/Volume1/SMSC/311x.pdf + * SMSC SCH5027 + Prefix: 'sch5027' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e + Datasheet: Provided by SMSC upon request and under NDA Authors: Juerg Haefliger <juergh@gmail.com> @@ -22,34 +26,36 @@ Module Parameters and PWM output control functions. Using this parameter shouldn't be required since the BIOS usually takes care of this. - -Note that there is no need to use this parameter if the driver loads without -complaining. The driver will say so if it is necessary. +* probe_all_addr: bool Include non-standard LPC addresses 0x162e and 0x164e + when probing for ISA devices. This is required for the + following boards: + - VIA EPIA SN18000 Description ----------- This driver implements support for the hardware monitoring capabilities of the -SMSC DME1737 and Asus A8000 (which are the same) and SMSC SCH311x Super-I/O -chips. These chips feature monitoring of 3 temp sensors temp[1-3] (2 remote -diodes and 1 internal), 7 voltages in[0-6] (6 external and 1 internal) and up -to 6 fan speeds fan[1-6]. Additionally, the chips implement up to 5 PWM -outputs pwm[1-3,5-6] for controlling fan speeds both manually and +SMSC DME1737 and Asus A8000 (which are the same), SMSC SCH5027, and SMSC +SCH311x Super-I/O chips. These chips feature monitoring of 3 temp sensors +temp[1-3] (2 remote diodes and 1 internal), 7 voltages in[0-6] (6 external and +1 internal) and up to 6 fan speeds fan[1-6]. Additionally, the chips implement +up to 5 PWM outputs pwm[1-3,5-6] for controlling fan speeds both manually and automatically. -For the DME1737 and A8000, fan[1-2] and pwm[1-2] are always present. Fan[3-6] -and pwm[3,5-6] are optional features and their availability depends on the -configuration of the chip. The driver will detect which features are present -during initialization and create the sysfs attributes accordingly. +For the DME1737, A8000 and SCH5027, fan[1-2] and pwm[1-2] are always present. +Fan[3-6] and pwm[3,5-6] are optional features and their availability depends on +the configuration of the chip. The driver will detect which features are +present during initialization and create the sysfs attributes accordingly. For the SCH311x, fan[1-3] and pwm[1-3] are always present and fan[4-6] and pwm[5-6] don't exist. -The hardware monitoring features of the DME1737 and A8000 are only accessible -via SMBus, while the SCH311x only provides access via the ISA bus. The driver -will therefore register itself as an I2C client driver if it detects a DME1737 -or A8000 and as a platform driver if it detects a SCH311x chip. +The hardware monitoring features of the DME1737, A8000, and SCH5027 are only +accessible via SMBus, while the SCH311x only provides access via the ISA bus. +The driver will therefore register itself as an I2C client driver if it detects +a DME1737, A8000, or SCH5027 and as a platform driver if it detects a SCH311x +chip. Voltage Monitoring @@ -60,6 +66,7 @@ scaling resistors. The values returned by the driver therefore reflect true millivolts and don't need scaling. The voltage inputs are mapped as follows (the last column indicates the input ranges): +DME1737, A8000: in0: +5VTR (+5V standby) 0V - 6.64V in1: Vccp (processor core) 0V - 3V in2: VCC (internal +3.3V) 0V - 4.38V @@ -68,6 +75,24 @@ millivolts and don't need scaling. The voltage inputs are mapped as follows in5: VTR (+3.3V standby) 0V - 4.38V in6: Vbat (+3.0V) 0V - 4.38V +SCH311x: + in0: +2.5V 0V - 6.64V + in1: Vccp (processor core) 0V - 2V + in2: VCC (internal +3.3V) 0V - 4.38V + in3: +5V 0V - 6.64V + in4: +12V 0V - 16V + in5: VTR (+3.3V standby) 0V - 4.38V + in6: Vbat (+3.0V) 0V - 4.38V + +SCH5027: + in0: +5VTR (+5V standby) 0V - 6.64V + in1: Vccp (processor core) 0V - 3V + in2: VCC (internal +3.3V) 0V - 4.38V + in3: V2_IN 0V - 1.5V + in4: V1_IN 0V - 1.5V + in5: VTR (+3.3V standby) 0V - 4.38V + in6: Vbat (+3.0V) 0V - 4.38V + Each voltage input has associated min and max limits which trigger an alarm when crossed. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem b/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem index 2fefaf582a43..e98bdfea3467 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem @@ -1,8 +1,11 @@ Kernel driver ibmaem ====================== +This driver talks to the IBM Systems Director Active Energy Manager, known +henceforth as AEM. + Supported systems: - * Any recent IBM System X server with Active Energy Manager support. + * Any recent IBM System X server with AEM support. This includes the x3350, x3550, x3650, x3655, x3755, x3850 M2, x3950 M2, and certain HS2x/LS2x/QS2x blades. The IPMI host interface driver ("ipmi-si") needs to be loaded for this driver to do anything. @@ -14,24 +17,22 @@ Author: Darrick J. Wong Description ----------- -This driver implements sensor reading support for the energy and power -meters available on various IBM System X hardware through the BMC. All -sensor banks will be exported as platform devices; this driver can talk -to both v1 and v2 interfaces. This driver is completely separate from the -older ibmpex driver. +This driver implements sensor reading support for the energy and power meters +available on various IBM System X hardware through the BMC. All sensor banks +will be exported as platform devices; this driver can talk to both v1 and v2 +interfaces. This driver is completely separate from the older ibmpex driver. -The v1 AEM interface has a simple set of features to monitor energy use. -There is a register that displays an estimate of raw energy consumption -since the last BMC reset, and a power sensor that returns average power -use over a configurable interval. +The v1 AEM interface has a simple set of features to monitor energy use. There +is a register that displays an estimate of raw energy consumption since the +last BMC reset, and a power sensor that returns average power use over a +configurable interval. -The v2 AEM interface is a bit more sophisticated, being able to present -a wider range of energy and power use registers, the power cap as -set by the AEM software, and temperature sensors. +The v2 AEM interface is a bit more sophisticated, being able to present a wider +range of energy and power use registers, the power cap as set by the AEM +software, and temperature sensors. Special Features ---------------- -The "power_cap" value displays the current system power cap, as set by -the Active Energy Manager software. Setting the power cap from the host -is not currently supported. +The "power_cap" value displays the current system power cap, as set by the AEM +software. Setting the power cap from the host is not currently supported. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 b/Documentation/hwmon/it87 index f4ce1fdbeff6..3496b7020e7c 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/it87 @@ -6,12 +6,14 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'it87' Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports) Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website - http://www.ite.com.tw/ + http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8705F_V.0.4.1.pdf * IT8712F Prefix: 'it8712' Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports) Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website - http://www.ite.com.tw/ + http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8712F_V0.9.1.pdf + http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/Errata%20V0.1%20for%20IT8712F%20V0.9.1.pdf + http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8712F_V0.9.3.pdf * IT8716F/IT8726F Prefix: 'it8716' Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports) @@ -90,14 +92,13 @@ upper VID bits share their pins with voltage inputs (in5 and in6) so you can't have both on a given board. The IT8716F, IT8718F and later IT8712F revisions have support for -2 additional fans. They are supported by the driver for the IT8716F and -IT8718F but not for the IT8712F +2 additional fans. The additional fans are supported by the driver. The IT8716F and IT8718F, and late IT8712F and IT8705F also have optional 16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to 3. This is better (no more fan clock divider mess) but not compatible with the older chips and -revisions. For now, the driver only uses the 16-bit mode on the -IT8716F and IT8718F. +revisions. The 16-bit tachometer mode is enabled by the driver when one +of the above chips is detected. The IT8726F is just bit enhanced IT8716F with additional hardware for AMD power sequencing. Therefore the chip will appear as IT8716F diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 index 9549237530cf..6d41db7f17f8 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 @@ -96,11 +96,6 @@ initial testing of the ADM1027 it was 1.00 degC steps. Analog Devices has confirmed this "bug". The ADT7463 is reported to work as described in the documentation. The current lm85 driver does not show the offset register. -The ADT7463 has a THERM asserted counter. This counter has a 22.76ms -resolution and a range of 5.8 seconds. The driver implements a 32-bit -accumulator of the counter value to extend the range to over a year. The -counter will stay at it's max value until read. - See the vendor datasheets for more information. There is application note from National (AN-1260) with some additional information about the LM85. The Analog Devices datasheet is very detailed and describes a procedure for @@ -206,13 +201,15 @@ Configuration choices: The National LM85's have two vendor specific configuration features. Tach. mode and Spinup Control. For more details on these, -see the LM85 datasheet or Application Note AN-1260. +see the LM85 datasheet or Application Note AN-1260. These features +are not currently supported by the lm85 driver. The Analog Devices ADM1027 has several vendor specific enhancements. The number of pulses-per-rev of the fans can be set, Tach monitoring can be optimized for PWM operation, and an offset can be applied to the temperatures to compensate for systemic errors in the -measurements. +measurements. These features are not currently supported by the lm85 +driver. In addition to the ADM1027 features, the ADT7463 also has Tmin control and THERM asserted counts. Automatic Tmin control acts to adjust the diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface index 2d845730d4e0..6dbfd5efd991 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface @@ -329,6 +329,10 @@ power[1-*]_average Average power use Unit: microWatt RO +power[1-*]_average_interval Power use averaging interval + Unit: milliseconds + RW + power[1-*]_average_highest Historical average maximum power use Unit: microWatt RO @@ -354,6 +358,14 @@ power[1-*]_reset_history Reset input_highest, input_lowest, WO ********** +* Energy * +********** + +energy[1-*]_input Cumulative energy use + Unit: microJoule + RO + +********** * Alarms * ********** diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf index 880a59f53da9..6ee36dbafd64 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf @@ -40,10 +40,6 @@ Module Parameters (default is 1) Use 'init=0' to bypass initializing the chip. Try this if your computer crashes when you load the module. -* reset: int - (default is 0) - The driver used to reset the chip on load, but does no more. Use - 'reset=1' to restore the old behavior. Report if you need to do this. Description ----------- diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d index f153b2f6d62c..a67d3b7a7098 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d @@ -22,6 +22,7 @@ Credits: Additional contributors: Sven Anders <anders@anduras.de> + Marc Hulsman <m.hulsman@tudelft.nl> Module Parameters ----------------- @@ -67,9 +68,8 @@ on until the temperature falls below the Hysteresis value. Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan -readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4, 8 for fan 1/2/3 -and 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or 128 for fan 4/5) to give the readings more -range or accuracy. +readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, +32, 64 or 128 for all fans) to give the readings more range or accuracy. Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in millivolts. An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients b/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9a45f9bb6a25 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients @@ -0,0 +1,281 @@ +Upgrading I2C Drivers to the new 2.6 Driver Model +================================================= + +Ben Dooks <ben-linux@fluff.org> + +Introduction +------------ + +This guide outlines how to alter existing Linux 2.6 client drivers from +the old to the new new binding methods. + + +Example old-style driver +------------------------ + + +struct example_state { + struct i2c_client client; + .... +}; + +static struct i2c_driver example_driver; + +static unsigned short ignore[] = { I2C_CLIENT_END }; +static unsigned short normal_addr[] = { OUR_ADDR, I2C_CLIENT_END }; + +I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD; + +static int example_attach(struct i2c_adapter *adap, int addr, int kind) +{ + struct example_state *state; + struct device *dev = &adap->dev; /* to use for dev_ reports */ + int ret; + + state = kzalloc(sizeof(struct example_state), GFP_KERNEL); + if (state == NULL) { + dev_err(dev, "failed to create our state\n"); + return -ENOMEM; + } + + example->client.addr = addr; + example->client.flags = 0; + example->client.adapter = adap; + + i2c_set_clientdata(&state->i2c_client, state); + strlcpy(client->i2c_client.name, "example", I2C_NAME_SIZE); + + ret = i2c_attach_client(&state->i2c_client); + if (ret < 0) { + dev_err(dev, "failed to attach client\n"); + kfree(state); + return ret; + } + + dev = &state->i2c_client.dev; + + /* rest of the initialisation goes here. */ + + dev_info(dev, "example client created\n"); + + return 0; +} + +static int __devexit example_detach(struct i2c_client *client) +{ + struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client); + + i2c_detach_client(client); + kfree(state); + return 0; +} + +static int example_attach_adapter(struct i2c_adapter *adap) +{ + return i2c_probe(adap, &addr_data, example_attach); +} + +static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { + .driver = { + .owner = THIS_MODULE, + .name = "example", + }, + .attach_adapter = example_attach_adapter, + .detach_client = __devexit_p(example_detach), + .suspend = example_suspend, + .resume = example_resume, +}; + + +Updating the client +------------------- + +The new style binding model will check against a list of supported +devices and their associated address supplied by the code registering +the busses. This means that the driver .attach_adapter and +.detach_adapter methods can be removed, along with the addr_data, +as follows: + +- static struct i2c_driver example_driver; + +- static unsigned short ignore[] = { I2C_CLIENT_END }; +- static unsigned short normal_addr[] = { OUR_ADDR, I2C_CLIENT_END }; + +- I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD; + +- static int example_attach_adapter(struct i2c_adapter *adap) +- { +- return i2c_probe(adap, &addr_data, example_attach); +- } + + static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { +- .attach_adapter = example_attach_adapter, +- .detach_client = __devexit_p(example_detach), + } + +Add the probe and remove methods to the i2c_driver, as so: + + static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { ++ .probe = example_probe, ++ .remove = __devexit_p(example_remove), + } + +Change the example_attach method to accept the new parameters +which include the i2c_client that it will be working with: + +- static int example_attach(struct i2c_adapter *adap, int addr, int kind) ++ static int example_probe(struct i2c_client *client, ++ const struct i2c_device_id *id) + +Change the name of example_attach to example_probe to align it with the +i2c_driver entry names. The rest of the probe routine will now need to be +changed as the i2c_client has already been setup for use. + +The necessary client fields have already been setup before +the probe function is called, so the following client setup +can be removed: + +- example->client.addr = addr; +- example->client.flags = 0; +- example->client.adapter = adap; +- +- strlcpy(client->i2c_client.name, "example", I2C_NAME_SIZE); + +The i2c_set_clientdata is now: + +- i2c_set_clientdata(&state->client, state); ++ i2c_set_clientdata(client, state); + +The call to i2c_attach_client is no longer needed, if the probe +routine exits successfully, then the driver will be automatically +attached by the core. Change the probe routine as so: + +- ret = i2c_attach_client(&state->i2c_client); +- if (ret < 0) { +- dev_err(dev, "failed to attach client\n"); +- kfree(state); +- return ret; +- } + + +Remove the storage of 'struct i2c_client' from the 'struct example_state' +as we are provided with the i2c_client in our example_probe. Instead we +store a pointer to it for when it is needed. + +struct example_state { +- struct i2c_client client; ++ struct i2c_client *client; + +the new i2c client as so: + +- struct device *dev = &adap->dev; /* to use for dev_ reports */ ++ struct device *dev = &i2c_client->dev; /* to use for dev_ reports */ + +And remove the change after our client is attached, as the driver no +longer needs to register a new client structure with the core: + +- dev = &state->i2c_client.dev; + +In the probe routine, ensure that the new state has the client stored +in it: + +static int example_probe(struct i2c_client *i2c_client, + const struct i2c_device_id *id) +{ + struct example_state *state; + struct device *dev = &i2c_client->dev; + int ret; + + state = kzalloc(sizeof(struct example_state), GFP_KERNEL); + if (state == NULL) { + dev_err(dev, "failed to create our state\n"); + return -ENOMEM; + } + ++ state->client = i2c_client; + +Update the detach method, by changing the name to _remove and +to delete the i2c_detach_client call. It is possible that you +can also remove the ret variable as it is not not needed for +any of the core functions. + +- static int __devexit example_detach(struct i2c_client *client) ++ static int __devexit example_remove(struct i2c_client *client) +{ + struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client); + +- i2c_detach_client(client); + +And finally ensure that we have the correct ID table for the i2c-core +and other utilities: + ++ struct i2c_device_id example_idtable[] = { ++ { "example", 0 }, ++ { } ++}; ++ ++MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(i2c, example_idtable); + +static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { + .driver = { + .owner = THIS_MODULE, + .name = "example", + }, ++ .id_table = example_ids, + + +Our driver should now look like this: + +struct example_state { + struct i2c_client *client; + .... +}; + +static int example_probe(struct i2c_client *client, + const struct i2c_device_id *id) +{ + struct example_state *state; + struct device *dev = &client->dev; + + state = kzalloc(sizeof(struct example_state), GFP_KERNEL); + if (state == NULL) { + dev_err(dev, "failed to create our state\n"); + return -ENOMEM; + } + + state->client = client; + i2c_set_clientdata(client, state); + + /* rest of the initialisation goes here. */ + + dev_info(dev, "example client created\n"); + + return 0; +} + +static int __devexit example_remove(struct i2c_client *client) +{ + struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client); + + kfree(state); + return 0; +} + +static struct i2c_device_id example_idtable[] = { + { "example", 0 }, + { } +}; + +MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(i2c, example_idtable); + +static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { + .driver = { + .owner = THIS_MODULE, + .name = "example", + }, + .id_table = example_idtable, + .probe = example_probe, + .remove = __devexit_p(example_remove), + .suspend = example_suspend, + .resume = example_resume, +}; diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/Makefile b/Documentation/ia64/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b75db69ec483 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ia64/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := aliasing-test + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt b/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt index bec9d815da33..914d07f49268 100644 --- a/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt +++ b/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt @@ -50,9 +50,9 @@ Note: For step 2, please make sure that host page size == TARGET_PAGE_SIZE of qe /usr/local/bin/qemu-system-ia64 -smp xx -m 512 -hda $your_image (xx is the number of virtual processors for the guest, now the maximum value is 4) -5. Known possibile issue on some platforms with old Firmware. +5. Known possible issue on some platforms with old Firmware. -If meet strange host crashe issues, try to solve it through either of the following ways: +In the event of strange host crash issues, try to solve it through either of the following ways: (1): Upgrade your Firmware to the latest one. @@ -65,8 +65,8 @@ index 0b53344..f02b0f7 100644 mov ar.pfs = loc1 mov rp = loc0 ;; -- srlz.d // seralize restoration of psr.l -+ srlz.i // seralize restoration of psr.l +- srlz.d // serialize restoration of psr.l ++ srlz.i // serialize restoration of psr.l + ;; br.ret.sptk.many b0 END(ia64_pal_call_static) diff --git a/Documentation/input/cs461x.txt b/Documentation/input/cs461x.txt index afe0d6543e09..202e9dbacec3 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/cs461x.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/cs461x.txt @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ The driver works with ALSA drivers simultaneously. For example, the xracer uses joystick as input device and PCM device as sound output in one time. There are no sound or input collisions detected. The source code have comments about them; but I've found the joystick can be initialized -separately of ALSA modules. So, you canm use only one joystick driver +separately of ALSA modules. So, you can use only one joystick driver without ALSA drivers. The ALSA drivers are not needed to compile or run this driver. diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt index 3bb5f466a90d..1c6b545635a2 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt @@ -105,7 +105,6 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments 'T' all linux/soundcard.h conflict! 'T' all asm-i386/ioctls.h conflict! 'U' 00-EF linux/drivers/usb/usb.h -'U' F0-FF drivers/usb/auerswald.c 'V' all linux/vt.h 'W' 00-1F linux/watchdog.h conflict! 'W' 00-1F linux/wanrouter.h conflict! diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/cdrom.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/cdrom.txt index 62d4af44ec4a..59df81c8da2b 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/cdrom.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/cdrom.txt @@ -271,14 +271,14 @@ CDROMCLOSETRAY pendant of CDROMEJECT usage: - ioctl(fd, CDROMEJECT, 0); + ioctl(fd, CDROMCLOSETRAY, 0); inputs: none outputs: none error returns: - ENOSYS cd drive not capable of ejecting + ENOSYS cd drive not capable of closing the tray EBUSY other processes are accessing drive, or door is locked notes: diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt index bfdf7f3ee4f0..e35efb0cec2e 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ To decode a hex IOCTL code: -Most architecures use this generic format, but check +Most architectures use this generic format, but check include/ARCH/ioctl.h for specifics, e.g. powerpc uses 3 bits to encode read/write and 13 bits for size. @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ uses 3 bits to encode read/write and 13 bits for size. 7-0 function # - So for example 0x82187201 is a read with arg length of 0x218, +So for example 0x82187201 is a read with arg length of 0x218, character 'r' function 1. Grepping the source reveals this is: #define VFAT_IOCTL_READDIR_BOTH _IOR('r', 1, struct dirent [2]) diff --git a/Documentation/iostats.txt b/Documentation/iostats.txt index 5925c3cd030d..59a69ec67c40 100644 --- a/Documentation/iostats.txt +++ b/Documentation/iostats.txt @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ disk and partition statistics are consistent again. Since we still don't keep record of the partition-relative address, an operation is attributed to the partition which contains the first sector of the request after the eventual merges. As requests can be merged across partition, this could lead -to some (probably insignificant) innacuracy. +to some (probably insignificant) inaccuracy. Additional notes ---------------- diff --git a/Documentation/isdn/README.mISDN b/Documentation/isdn/README.mISDN new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cd8bf920e77b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/isdn/README.mISDN @@ -0,0 +1,6 @@ +mISDN is a new modular ISDN driver, in the long term it should replace +the old I4L driver architecture for passiv ISDN cards. +It was designed to allow a broad range of applications and interfaces +but only have the basic function in kernel, the interface to the user +space is based on sockets with a own address family AF_ISDN. + diff --git a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO index 488c77fa3aae..0775cf4798b2 100644 --- a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO @@ -11,14 +11,14 @@ for non English (read: Japanese) speakers and is not intended as a fork. So if you have any comments or updates for this file, please try to update the original English file first. -Last Updated: 2007/11/16 +Last Updated: 2008/08/21 ================================== これは、 -linux-2.6.24/Documentation/HOWTO +linux-2.6.27/Documentation/HOWTO の和訳です。 翻訳団体： JF プロジェクト < http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/ > -翻訳日： 2007/11/10 +翻訳日： 2008/8/5 翻訳者： Tsugikazu Shibata <tshibata at ab dot jp dot nec dot com> 校正者： 松倉さん <nbh--mats at nifty dot com> 小林 雅典さん (Masanori Kobayasi) <zap03216 at nifty dot ne dot jp> @@ -287,13 +287,15 @@ Linux カーネルの開発プロセスは現在幾つかの異なるメイン に安定した状態にあると判断したときにリリースされます。目標は毎週新 しい -rc カーネルをリリースすることです。 - - 以下の URL で各 -rc リリースに存在する既知の後戻り問題のリスト - が追跡されます- - http://kernelnewbies.org/known_regressions - - このプロセスはカーネルが 「準備ができた」と考えられるまで継続しま す。このプロセスはだいたい 6週間継続します。 + - 各リリースでの既知の後戻り問題(regression: このリリースの中で新規 + に作り込まれた問題を指す) はその都度 Linux-kernel メーリングリスト + に投稿されます。ゴールとしては、カーネルが 「準備ができた」と宣言 + する前にこのリストの長さをゼロに減らすことですが、現実には、数個の + 後戻り問題がリリース時にたびたび残ってしまいます。 + Andrew Morton が Linux-kernel メーリングリストにカーネルリリースについ て書いたことをここで言っておくことは価値があります- 「カーネルがいつリリースされるかは誰も知りません。なぜなら、これは現 @@ -303,18 +305,20 @@ Andrew Morton が Linux-kernel メーリングリストにカーネルリリー 2.6.x.y -stable カーネルツリー --------------------------- -バージョンに4つ目の数字がついたカーネルは -stable カーネルです。これに -は、2.6.x カーネルで見つかったセキュリティ問題や重大な後戻りに対する比 -較的小さい重要な修正が含まれます。 +バージョン番号が4つの数字に分かれているカーネルは -stable カーネルです。 +これには、2.6.x カーネルで見つかったセキュリティ問題や重大な後戻りに対 +する比較的小さい重要な修正が含まれます。 これは、開発/実験的バージョンのテストに協力することに興味が無く、 最新の安定したカーネルを使いたいユーザに推奨するブランチです。 -もし、2.6.x.y カーネルが存在しない場合には、番号が一番大きい 2.6.x -が最新の安定版カーネルです。 +もし、2.6.x.y カーネルが存在しない場合には、番号が一番大きい 2.6.x が +最新の安定版カーネルです。 -2.6.x.y は "stable" チーム <stable@kernel.org> でメンテされており、だ -いたい隔週でリリースされています。 +2.6.x.y は "stable" チーム <stable@kernel.org> でメンテされており、必 +要に応じてリリースされます。通常のリリース期間は 2週間毎ですが、差し迫っ +た問題がなければもう少し長くなることもあります。セキュリティ関連の問題 +の場合はこれに対してだいたいの場合、すぐにリリースがされます。 カーネルツリーに入っている、Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt ファ イルにはどのような種類の変更が -stable ツリーに受け入れ可能か、またリ @@ -341,7 +345,9 @@ linux-kernel メーリングリストで収集された多数のパッチと同 メインラインへ入れるように Linus にプッシュします。 メインカーネルツリーに含めるために Linus に送る前に、すべての新しいパッ -チが -mm ツリーでテストされることが強く推奨されます。 +チが -mm ツリーでテストされることが強く推奨されています。マージウィン +ドウが開く前に -mm ツリーに現れなかったパッチはメインラインにマージさ +れることは困難になります。 これらのカーネルは安定して動作すべきシステムとして使うのには適切ではあ りませんし、カーネルブランチの中でももっとも動作にリスクが高いものです。 @@ -395,13 +401,15 @@ linux-kernel メーリングリストで収集された多数のパッチと同 - pcmcia, Dominik Brodowski <linux@dominikbrodowski.net> git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/brodo/pcmcia-2.6.git - - SCSI, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@SteelEye.com> + - SCSI, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@hansenpartnership.com> git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jejb/scsi-misc-2.6.git + - x86, Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu> + git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/x86/linux-2.6-x86.git + quilt ツリー- - - USB, PCI ドライバコアと I2C, Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de> + - USB, ドライバコアと I2C, Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de> kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/gregkh/gregkh-2.6/ - - x86-64 と i386 の仲間 Andi Kleen <ak@suse.de> その他のカーネルツリーは http://git.kernel.org/ と MAINTAINERS ファ イルに一覧表があります。 @@ -412,13 +420,32 @@ linux-kernel メーリングリストで収集された多数のパッチと同 bugzilla.kernel.org は Linux カーネル開発者がカーネルのバグを追跡する 場所です。ユーザは見つけたバグの全てをこのツールで報告すべきです。 どう kernel bugzilla を使うかの詳細は、以下を参照してください- - http://test.kernel.org/bugzilla/faq.html - + http://bugzilla.kernel.org/page.cgi?id=faq.html メインカーネルソースディレクトリにあるファイル REPORTING-BUGS はカーネ ルバグらしいものについてどうレポートするかの良いテンプレートであり、問 題の追跡を助けるためにカーネル開発者にとってどんな情報が必要なのかの詳 細が書かれています。 +バグレポートの管理 +------------------- + +あなたのハッキングのスキルを訓練する最高の方法のひとつに、他人がレポー +トしたバグを修正することがあります。あなたがカーネルをより安定化させる +こに寄与するということだけでなく、あなたは 現実の問題を修正することを +学び、自分のスキルも強化でき、また他の開発者があなたの存在に気がつき +ます。バグを修正することは、多くの開発者の中から自分が功績をあげる最善 +の道です、なぜなら多くの人は他人のバグの修正に時間を浪費することを好ま +ないからです。 + +すでにレポートされたバグのために仕事をするためには、 +http://bugzilla.kernel.org に行ってください。もし今後のバグレポートに +ついてアドバイスを受けたいのであれば、bugme-new メーリングリスト(新し +いバグレポートだけがここにメールされる) または bugme-janitor メーリン +グリスト(bugzilla の変更毎にここにメールされる)を購読できます。 + + http://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new + http://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors + メーリングリスト ------------- diff --git a/Documentation/ja_JP/SubmitChecklist b/Documentation/ja_JP/SubmitChecklist new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6c42e071d723 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ja_JP/SubmitChecklist @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +NOTE: +This is a version of Documentation/SubmitChecklist into Japanese. +This document is maintained by Takenori Nagano <t-nagano@ah.jp.nec.com> +and the JF Project team <http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/>. +If you find any difference between this document and the original file +or a problem with the translation, +please contact the maintainer of this file or JF project. + +Please also note that the purpose of this file is to be easier to read +for non English (read: Japanese) speakers and is not intended as a +fork. So if you have any comments or updates of this file, please try +to update the original English file first. + +Last Updated: 2008/07/14 +================================== +これは、 +linux-2.6.26/Documentation/SubmitChecklist の和訳です。 + +翻訳団体： JF プロジェクト < http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/ > +翻訳日： 2008/07/14 +翻訳者： Takenori Nagano <t-nagano at ah dot jp dot nec dot com> +校正者： Masanori Kobayashi さん <zap03216 at nifty dot ne dot jp> +================================== + + +Linux カーネルパッチ投稿者向けチェックリスト +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +本書では、パッチをより素早く取り込んでもらいたい開発者が実践すべき基本的な事柄 +をいくつか紹介します。ここにある全ての事柄は、Documentation/SubmittingPatches +などのLinuxカーネルパッチ投稿に際しての心得を補足するものです。 + + 1: 妥当なCONFIGオプションや変更されたCONFIGオプション、つまり =y, =m, =n + 全てで正しくビルドできることを確認してください。その際、gcc及びリンカが + warningやerrorを出していないことも確認してください。 + + 2: allnoconfig, allmodconfig オプションを用いて正しくビルドできることを + 確認してください。 + + 3: 手許のクロスコンパイルツールやOSDLのPLMのようなものを用いて、複数の + アーキテクチャにおいても正しくビルドできることを確認してください。 + + 4: 64bit長の'unsigned long'を使用しているppc64は、クロスコンパイルでの + チェックに適当なアーキテクチャです。 + + 5: カーネルコーディングスタイルに準拠しているかどうか確認してください(!) + + 6: CONFIGオプションの追加・変更をした場合には、CONFIGメニューが壊れていない + ことを確認してください。 + + 7: 新しくKconfigのオプションを追加する際には、必ずそのhelpも記述してください。 + + 8: 適切なKconfigの依存関係を考えながら慎重にチェックしてください。 + ただし、この作業はマシンを使ったテストできちんと行うのがとても困難です。 + うまくやるには、自分の頭で考えることです。 + + 9: sparseを利用してちゃんとしたコードチェックをしてください。 + +10: 'make checkstack' と 'make namespacecheck' を利用し、問題が発見されたら + 修正してください。'make checkstack' は明示的に問題を示しませんが、どれか + １つの関数が512バイトより大きいスタックを使っていれば、修正すべき候補と + なります。 + +11: グローバルなkernel API を説明する kernel-doc をソースの中に含めてください。 + ( staticな関数においては必須ではありませんが、含めてもらっても結構です ) + そして、'make htmldocs' もしくは 'make mandocs' を利用して追記した + ドキュメントのチェックを行い、問題が見つかった場合には修正を行ってください。 + +12: CONFIG_PREEMPT, CONFIG_DEBUG_PREEMPT, CONFIG_DEBUG_SLAB, + CONFIG_DEBUG_PAGEALLOC, CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES, CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK, + CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK_SLEEP これら全てを同時に有効にして動作確認を + 行ってください。 + +13: CONFIG_SMP, CONFIG_PREEMPT を有効にした場合と無効にした場合の両方で + ビルドした上、動作確認を行ってください。 + +14: もしパッチがディスクのI/O性能などに影響を与えるようであれば、 + 'CONFIG_LBD'オプションを有効にした場合と無効にした場合の両方で + テストを実施してみてください。 + +15: lockdepの機能を全て有効にした上で、全てのコードパスを評価してください。 + +16: /proc に新しいエントリを追加した場合には、Documentation/ 配下に + 必ずドキュメントを追加してください。 + +17: 新しいブートパラメータを追加した場合には、 + 必ずDocumentation/kernel-parameters.txt に説明を追加してください。 + +18: 新しくmoduleにパラメータを追加した場合には、MODULE_PARM_DESC()を + 利用して必ずその説明を記述してください。 + +19: 新しいuserspaceインタフェースを作成した場合には、Documentation/ABI/ に + Documentation/ABI/README を参考にして必ずドキュメントを追加してください。 + +20: 'make headers_check'を実行して全く問題がないことを確認してください。 + +21: 少なくともslabアロケーションとpageアロケーションに失敗した場合の + 挙動について、fault-injectionを利用して確認してください。 + Documentation/fault-injection/ を参照してください。 + + 追加したコードがかなりの量であったならば、サブシステム特有の + fault-injectionを追加したほうが良いかもしれません。 + +22: 新たに追加したコードは、`gcc -W'でコンパイルしてください。 + このオプションは大量の不要なメッセージを出力しますが、 + "warning: comparison between signed and unsigned" のようなメッセージは、 + バグを見つけるのに役に立ちます。 + +23: 投稿したパッチが -mm パッチセットにマージされた後、全ての既存のパッチや + VM, VFS およびその他のサブシステムに関する様々な変更と、現時点でも共存 + できることを確認するテストを行ってください。 diff --git a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt index 9691c7f5166c..0705040531a5 100644 --- a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt +++ b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt @@ -65,26 +65,26 @@ Install kexec-tools 2) Download the kexec-tools user-space package from the following URL: -http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/kexec-tools-testing.tar.gz +http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/kexec-tools.tar.gz -This is a symlink to the latest version, which at the time of writing is -20061214, the only release of kexec-tools-testing so far. As other versions -are released, the older ones will remain available at -http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/ +This is a symlink to the latest version. -Note: Latest kexec-tools-testing git tree is available at +The latest kexec-tools git tree is available at: -git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools-testing.git +git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools.git or -http://www.kernel.org/git/?p=linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools-testing.git;a=summary +http://www.kernel.org/git/?p=linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools.git + +More information about kexec-tools can be found at +http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/README.html 3) Unpack the tarball with the tar command, as follows: - tar xvpzf kexec-tools-testing.tar.gz + tar xvpzf kexec-tools.tar.gz 4) Change to the kexec-tools directory, as follows: - cd kexec-tools-testing-VERSION + cd kexec-tools-VERSION 5) Configure the package, as follows: diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt index 0bd32748a467..c6841eee9598 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt @@ -168,10 +168,10 @@ if ($#ARGV < 0) { mkdir $ARGV[0],0777; $state = 0; while (<STDIN>) { - if (/^\.TH \"[^\"]*\" 4 \"([^\"]*)\"/) { + if (/^\.TH \"[^\"]*\" 9 \"([^\"]*)\"/) { if ($state == 1) { close OUT } $state = 1; - $fn = "$ARGV[0]/$1.4"; + $fn = "$ARGV[0]/$1.9"; print STDERR "Creating $fn\n"; open OUT, ">$fn" or die "can't open $fn: $!\n"; print OUT $_; diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index e7bea3e85304..2443f5bb4364 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -284,6 +284,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file isolate - enable device isolation (each device, as far as possible, will get its own protection domain) + fullflush - enable flushing of IO/TLB entries when + they are unmapped. Otherwise they are + flushed before they will be reused, which + is a lot of faster + amd_iommu_size= [HW,X86-64] Define the size of the aperture for the AMD IOMMU driver. Possible values are: @@ -365,6 +370,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file no delay (0). Format: integer + bootmem_debug [KNL] Enable bootmem allocator debug messages. + bttv.card= [HW,V4L] bttv (bt848 + bt878 based grabber cards) bttv.radio= Most important insmod options are available as kernel args too. @@ -461,12 +468,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file Range: 0 - 8192 Default: 64 - disable_8254_timer - enable_8254_timer - [IA32/X86_64] Disable/Enable interrupt 0 timer routing - over the 8254 in addition to over the IO-APIC. The - kernel tries to set a sensible default. - hpet= [X86-32,HPET] option to control HPET usage Format: { enable (default) | disable | force } disable: disable HPET and use PIT instead @@ -657,11 +658,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file earlyprintk= [X86-32,X86-64,SH,BLACKFIN] earlyprintk=vga earlyprintk=serial[,ttySn[,baudrate]] + earlyprintk=dbgp Append ",keep" to not disable it when the real console takes over. - Only vga or serial at a time, not both. + Only vga or serial or usb debug port at a time. Currently only ttyS0 and ttyS1 are supported. @@ -1018,6 +1020,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file (only serial suported for now) Format: <serial_device>[,baud] + kmac= [MIPS] korina ethernet MAC address. + Configure the RouterBoard 532 series on-chip + Ethernet adapter MAC address. + l2cr= [PPC] l3cr= [PPC] @@ -1072,6 +1078,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file * [no]ncq: Turn on or off NCQ. + * nohrst, nosrst, norst: suppress hard, soft + and both resets. + If there are multiple matching configurations changing the same attribute, the last one is used. @@ -1223,6 +1232,29 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file or memmap=0x10000$0x18690000 + memory_corruption_check=0/1 [X86] + Some BIOSes seem to corrupt the first 64k of + memory when doing things like suspend/resume. + Setting this option will scan the memory + looking for corruption. Enabling this will + both detect corruption and prevent the kernel + from using the memory being corrupted. + However, its intended as a diagnostic tool; if + repeatable BIOS-originated corruption always + affects the same memory, you can use memmap= + to prevent the kernel from using that memory. + + memory_corruption_check_size=size [X86] + By default it checks for corruption in the low + 64k, making this memory unavailable for normal + use. Use this parameter to scan for + corruption in more or less memory. + + memory_corruption_check_period=seconds [X86] + By default it checks for corruption every 60 + seconds. Use this parameter to check at some + other rate. 0 disables periodic checking. + memtest= [KNL,X86] Enable memtest Format: <integer> range: 0,4 : pattern number @@ -1420,6 +1452,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nolapic_timer [X86-32,APIC] Do not use the local APIC timer. + nox2apic [X86-64,APIC] Do not enable x2APIC mode. + + x2apic_phys [X86-64,APIC] Use x2apic physical mode instead of + default x2apic cluster mode on platforms + supporting x2apic. + noltlbs [PPC] Do not use large page/tlb entries for kernel lowmem mapping on PPC40x. @@ -1877,6 +1915,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file shapers= [NET] Maximal number of shapers. + show_msr= [x86] show boot-time MSR settings + Format: { <integer> } + Show boot-time (BIOS-initialized) MSR settings. + The parameter means the number of CPUs to show, + for example 1 means boot CPU only. + sim710= [SCSI,HW] See header of drivers/scsi/sim710.c. diff --git a/Documentation/keys.txt b/Documentation/keys.txt index d5c7a57d1700..b56aacc1fff8 100644 --- a/Documentation/keys.txt +++ b/Documentation/keys.txt @@ -864,7 +864,7 @@ payload contents" for more information. request_key_with_auxdata() respectively. These two functions return with the key potentially still under - construction. To wait for contruction completion, the following should be + construction. To wait for construction completion, the following should be called: int wait_for_key_construction(struct key *key, bool intr); diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt index 02dc748b76c4..71f0fe1fc1b0 100644 --- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt +++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ detailed description): - LCD brightness control - Volume control - Fan control and monitoring: fan speed, fan enable/disable - - Experimental: WAN enable and disable + - WAN enable and disable A compatibility table by model and feature is maintained on the web site, http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/. I appreciate any success or failure @@ -1375,18 +1375,13 @@ with EINVAL, try to set pwm1_enable to 1 and pwm1 to at least 128 (255 would be the safest choice, though). -EXPERIMENTAL: WAN ------------------ +WAN +--- procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/wan sysfs device attribute: wwan_enable (deprecated) sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_wwan_sw" -This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the implementation -directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as expected. USE -WITH CAUTION! To use this feature, you need to supply the -experimental=1 parameter when loading the module. - This feature shows the presence and current state of a W-WAN (Sierra Wireless EV-DO) device. diff --git a/Documentation/leds-class.txt b/Documentation/leds-class.txt index 18860ad9935a..6399557cdab3 100644 --- a/Documentation/leds-class.txt +++ b/Documentation/leds-class.txt @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Hardware accelerated blink of LEDs Some LEDs can be programmed to blink without any CPU interaction. To support this feature, a LED driver can optionally implement the -blink_set() function (see <linux/leds.h>). If implemeted, triggers can +blink_set() function (see <linux/leds.h>). If implemented, triggers can attempt to use it before falling back to software timers. The blink_set() function should return 0 if the blink setting is supported, or -EINVAL otherwise, which means that LED blinking will be handled by software. diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c index 82fafe0429fe..7228369d1014 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c +++ b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c @@ -36,11 +36,13 @@ #include <sched.h> #include <limits.h> #include <stddef.h> +#include <signal.h> #include "linux/lguest_launcher.h" #include "linux/virtio_config.h" #include "linux/virtio_net.h" #include "linux/virtio_blk.h" #include "linux/virtio_console.h" +#include "linux/virtio_rng.h" #include "linux/virtio_ring.h" #include "asm-x86/bootparam.h" /*L:110 We can ignore the 39 include files we need for this program, but I do @@ -64,8 +66,8 @@ typedef uint8_t u8; #endif /* We can have up to 256 pages for devices. */ #define DEVICE_PAGES 256 -/* This will occupy 2 pages: it must be a power of 2. */ -#define VIRTQUEUE_NUM 128 +/* This will occupy 3 pages: it must be a power of 2. */ +#define VIRTQUEUE_NUM 256 /*L:120 verbose is both a global flag and a macro. The C preprocessor allows * this, and although I wouldn't recommend it, it works quite nicely here. */ @@ -74,12 +76,19 @@ static bool verbose; do { if (verbose) printf(args); } while(0) /*:*/ -/* The pipe to send commands to the waker process */ -static int waker_fd; +/* File descriptors for the Waker. */ +struct { + int pipe[2]; + int lguest_fd; +} waker_fds; + /* The pointer to the start of guest memory. */ static void *guest_base; /* The maximum guest physical address allowed, and maximum possible. */ static unsigned long guest_limit, guest_max; +/* The pipe for signal hander to write to. */ +static int timeoutpipe[2]; +static unsigned int timeout_usec = 500; /* a per-cpu variable indicating whose vcpu is currently running */ static unsigned int __thread cpu_id; @@ -155,11 +164,14 @@ struct virtqueue /* Last available index we saw. */ u16 last_avail_idx; - /* The routine to call when the Guest pings us. */ - void (*handle_output)(int fd, struct virtqueue *me); + /* The routine to call when the Guest pings us, or timeout. */ + void (*handle_output)(int fd, struct virtqueue *me, bool timeout); /* Outstanding buffers */ unsigned int inflight; + + /* Is this blocked awaiting a timer? */ + bool blocked; }; /* Remember the arguments to the program so we can "reboot" */ @@ -190,6 +202,9 @@ static void *_convert(struct iovec *iov, size_t size, size_t align, return iov->iov_base; } +/* Wrapper for the last available index. Makes it easier to change. */ +#define lg_last_avail(vq) ((vq)->last_avail_idx) + /* The virtio configuration space is defined to be little-endian. x86 is * little-endian too, but it's nice to be explicit so we have these helpers. */ #define cpu_to_le16(v16) (v16) @@ -199,6 +214,33 @@ static void *_convert(struct iovec *iov, size_t size, size_t align, #define le32_to_cpu(v32) (v32) #define le64_to_cpu(v64) (v64) +/* Is this iovec empty? */ +static bool iov_empty(const struct iovec iov[], unsigned int num_iov) +{ + unsigned int i; + + for (i = 0; i < num_iov; i++) + if (iov[i].iov_len) + return false; + return true; +} + +/* Take len bytes from the front of this iovec. */ +static void iov_consume(struct iovec iov[], unsigned num_iov, unsigned len) +{ + unsigned int i; + + for (i = 0; i < num_iov; i++) { + unsigned int used; + + used = iov[i].iov_len < len ? iov[i].iov_len : len; + iov[i].iov_base += used; + iov[i].iov_len -= used; + len -= used; + } + assert(len == 0); +} + /* The device virtqueue descriptors are followed by feature bitmasks. */ static u8 *get_feature_bits(struct device *dev) { @@ -254,6 +296,7 @@ static void *map_zeroed_pages(unsigned int num) PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE|PROT_EXEC, MAP_PRIVATE, fd, 0); if (addr == MAP_FAILED) err(1, "Mmaping %u pages of /dev/zero", num); + close(fd); return addr; } @@ -540,69 +583,64 @@ static void add_device_fd(int fd) * watch, but handing a file descriptor mask through to the kernel is fairly * icky. * - * Instead, we fork off a process which watches the file descriptors and writes + * Instead, we clone off a thread which watches the file descriptors and writes * the LHREQ_BREAK command to the /dev/lguest file descriptor to tell the Host * stop running the Guest. This causes the Launcher to return from the * /dev/lguest read with -EAGAIN, where it will write to /dev/lguest to reset * the LHREQ_BREAK and wake us up again. * * This, of course, is merely a different *kind* of icky. + * + * Given my well-known antipathy to threads, I'd prefer to use processes. But + * it's easier to share Guest memory with threads, and trivial to share the + * devices.infds as the Launcher changes it. */ -static void wake_parent(int pipefd, int lguest_fd) +static int waker(void *unused) { - /* Add the pipe from the Launcher to the fdset in the device_list, so - * we watch it, too. */ - add_device_fd(pipefd); + /* Close the write end of the pipe: only the Launcher has it open. */ + close(waker_fds.pipe[1]); for (;;) { fd_set rfds = devices.infds; unsigned long args[] = { LHREQ_BREAK, 1 }; + unsigned int maxfd = devices.max_infd; + + /* We also listen to the pipe from the Launcher. */ + FD_SET(waker_fds.pipe[0], &rfds); + if (waker_fds.pipe[0] > maxfd) + maxfd = waker_fds.pipe[0]; /* Wait until input is ready from one of the devices. */ - select(devices.max_infd+1, &rfds, NULL, NULL, NULL); - /* Is it a message from the Launcher? */ - if (FD_ISSET(pipefd, &rfds)) { - int fd; - /* If read() returns 0, it means the Launcher has - * exited. We silently follow. */ - if (read(pipefd, &fd, sizeof(fd)) == 0) - exit(0); - /* Otherwise it's telling us to change what file - * descriptors we're to listen to. Positive means - * listen to a new one, negative means stop - * listening. */ - if (fd >= 0) - FD_SET(fd, &devices.infds); - else - FD_CLR(-fd - 1, &devices.infds); - } else /* Send LHREQ_BREAK command. */ - pwrite(lguest_fd, args, sizeof(args), cpu_id); + select(maxfd+1, &rfds, NULL, NULL, NULL); + + /* Message from Launcher? */ + if (FD_ISSET(waker_fds.pipe[0], &rfds)) { + char c; + /* If this fails, then assume Launcher has exited. + * Don't do anything on exit: we're just a thread! */ + if (read(waker_fds.pipe[0], &c, 1) != 1) + _exit(0); + continue; + } + + /* Send LHREQ_BREAK command to snap the Launcher out of it. */ + pwrite(waker_fds.lguest_fd, args, sizeof(args), cpu_id); } + return 0; } /* This routine just sets up a pipe to the Waker process. */ -static int setup_waker(int lguest_fd) -{ - int pipefd[2], child; - - /* We create a pipe to talk to the Waker, and also so it knows when the - * Launcher dies (and closes pipe). */ - pipe(pipefd); - child = fork(); - if (child == -1) - err(1, "forking"); - - if (child == 0) { - /* We are the Waker: close the "writing" end of our copy of the - * pipe and start waiting for input. */ - close(pipefd[1]); - wake_parent(pipefd[0], lguest_fd); - } - /* Close the reading end of our copy of the pipe. */ - close(pipefd[0]); +static void setup_waker(int lguest_fd) +{ + /* This pipe is closed when Launcher dies, telling Waker. */ + if (pipe(waker_fds.pipe) != 0) + err(1, "Creating pipe for Waker"); + + /* Waker also needs to know the lguest fd */ + waker_fds.lguest_fd = lguest_fd; - /* Here is the fd used to talk to the waker. */ - return pipefd[1]; + if (clone(waker, malloc(4096) + 4096, CLONE_VM | SIGCHLD, NULL) == -1) + err(1, "Creating Waker"); } /* @@ -661,19 +699,22 @@ static unsigned get_vq_desc(struct virtqueue *vq, unsigned int *out_num, unsigned int *in_num) { unsigned int i, head; + u16 last_avail; /* Check it isn't doing very strange things with descriptor numbers. */ - if ((u16)(vq->vring.avail->idx - vq->last_avail_idx) > vq->vring.num) + last_avail = lg_last_avail(vq); + if ((u16)(vq->vring.avail->idx - last_avail) > vq->vring.num) errx(1, "Guest moved used index from %u to %u", - vq->last_avail_idx, vq->vring.avail->idx); + last_avail, vq->vring.avail->idx); /* If there's nothing new since last we looked, return invalid. */ - if (vq->vring.avail->idx == vq->last_avail_idx) + if (vq->vring.avail->idx == last_avail) return vq->vring.num; /* Grab the next descriptor number they're advertising, and increment * the index we've seen. */ - head = vq->vring.avail->ring[vq->last_avail_idx++ % vq->vring.num]; + head = vq->vring.avail->ring[last_avail % vq->vring.num]; + lg_last_avail(vq)++; /* If their number is silly, that's a fatal mistake. */ if (head >= vq->vring.num) @@ -821,8 +862,8 @@ static bool handle_console_input(int fd, struct device *dev) unsigned long args[] = { LHREQ_BREAK, 0 }; /* Close the fd so Waker will know it has to * exit. */ - close(waker_fd); - /* Just in case waker is blocked in BREAK, send + close(waker_fds.pipe[1]); + /* Just in case Waker is blocked in BREAK, send * unbreak now. */ write(fd, args, sizeof(args)); exit(2); @@ -839,7 +880,7 @@ static bool handle_console_input(int fd, struct device *dev) /* Handling output for console is simple: we just get all the output buffers * and write them to stdout. */ -static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq) +static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout) { unsigned int head, out, in; int len; @@ -854,6 +895,24 @@ static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq) } } +/* This is called when we no longer want to hear about Guest changes to a + * virtqueue. This is more efficient in high-traffic cases, but it means we + * have to set a timer to check if any more changes have occurred. */ +static void block_vq(struct virtqueue *vq) +{ + struct itimerval itm; + + vq->vring.used->flags |= VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY; + vq->blocked = true; + + itm.it_interval.tv_sec = 0; + itm.it_interval.tv_usec = 0; + itm.it_value.tv_sec = 0; + itm.it_value.tv_usec = timeout_usec; + + setitimer(ITIMER_REAL, &itm, NULL); +} + /* * The Network * @@ -861,22 +920,39 @@ static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq) * and write them (ignoring the first element) to this device's file descriptor * (/dev/net/tun). */ -static void handle_net_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq) +static void handle_net_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout) { - unsigned int head, out, in; + unsigned int head, out, in, num = 0; int len; struct iovec iov[vq->vring.num]; + static int last_timeout_num; /* Keep getting output buffers from the Guest until we run out. */ while ((head = get_vq_desc(vq, iov, &out, &in)) != vq->vring.num) { if (in) errx(1, "Input buffers in output queue?"); - /* Check header, but otherwise ignore it (we told the Guest we - * supported no features, so it shouldn't have anything - * interesting). */ - (void)convert(&iov[0], struct virtio_net_hdr); - len = writev(vq->dev->fd, iov+1, out-1); + len = writev(vq->dev->fd, iov, out); + if (len < 0) + err(1, "Writing network packet to tun"); add_used_and_trigger(fd, vq, head, len); + num++; + } + + /* Block further kicks and set up a timer if we saw anything. */ + if (!timeout && num) + block_vq(vq); + + /* We never quite know how long should we wait before we check the + * queue again for more packets. We start at 500 microseconds, and if + * we get fewer packets than last time, we assume we made the timeout + * too small and increase it by 10 microseconds. Otherwise, we drop it + * by one microsecond every time. It seems to work well enough. */ + if (timeout) { + if (num < last_timeout_num) + timeout_usec += 10; + else if (timeout_usec > 1) + timeout_usec--; + last_timeout_num = num; } } @@ -887,7 +963,6 @@ static bool handle_tun_input(int fd, struct device *dev) unsigned int head, in_num, out_num; int len; struct iovec iov[dev->vq->vring.num]; - struct virtio_net_hdr *hdr; /* First we need a network buffer from the Guests's recv virtqueue. */ head = get_vq_desc(dev->vq, iov, &out_num, &in_num); @@ -896,25 +971,23 @@ static bool handle_tun_input(int fd, struct device *dev) * early, the Guest won't be ready yet. Wait until the device * status says it's ready. */ /* FIXME: Actually want DRIVER_ACTIVE here. */ - if (dev->desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_DRIVER_OK) - warn("network: no dma buffer!"); + + /* Now tell it we want to know if new things appear. */ + dev->vq->vring.used->flags &= ~VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY; + wmb(); + /* We'll turn this back on if input buffers are registered. */ return false; } else if (out_num) errx(1, "Output buffers in network recv queue?"); - /* First element is the header: we set it to 0 (no features). */ - hdr = convert(&iov[0], struct virtio_net_hdr); - hdr->flags = 0; - hdr->gso_type = VIRTIO_NET_HDR_GSO_NONE; - /* Read the packet from the device directly into the Guest's buffer. */ - len = readv(dev->fd, iov+1, in_num-1); + len = readv(dev->fd, iov, in_num); if (len <= 0) err(1, "reading network"); /* Tell the Guest about the new packet. */ - add_used_and_trigger(fd, dev->vq, head, sizeof(*hdr) + len); + add_used_and_trigger(fd, dev->vq, head, len); verbose("tun input packet len %i [%02x %02x] (%s)\n", len, ((u8 *)iov[1].iov_base)[0], ((u8 *)iov[1].iov_base)[1], @@ -927,11 +1000,18 @@ static bool handle_tun_input(int fd, struct device *dev) /*L:215 This is the callback attached to the network and console input * virtqueues: it ensures we try again, in case we stopped console or net * delivery because Guest didn't have any buffers. */ -static void enable_fd(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq) +static void enable_fd(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout) { add_device_fd(vq->dev->fd); - /* Tell waker to listen to it again */ - write(waker_fd, &vq->dev->fd, sizeof(vq->dev->fd)); + /* Snap the Waker out of its select loop. */ + write(waker_fds.pipe[1], "", 1); +} + +static void net_enable_fd(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout) +{ + /* We don't need to know again when Guest refills receive buffer. */ + vq->vring.used->flags |= VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY; + enable_fd(fd, vq, timeout); } /* When the Guest tells us they updated the status field, we handle it. */ @@ -951,7 +1031,7 @@ static void update_device_status(struct device *dev) for (vq = dev->vq; vq; vq = vq->next) { memset(vq->vring.desc, 0, vring_size(vq->config.num, getpagesize())); - vq->last_avail_idx = 0; + lg_last_avail(vq) = 0; } } else if (dev->desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_FAILED) { warnx("Device %s configuration FAILED", dev->name); @@ -960,10 +1040,10 @@ static void update_device_status(struct device *dev) verbose("Device %s OK: offered", dev->name); for (i = 0; i < dev->desc->feature_len; i++) - verbose(" %08x", get_feature_bits(dev)[i]); + verbose(" %02x", get_feature_bits(dev)[i]); verbose(", accepted"); for (i = 0; i < dev->desc->feature_len; i++) - verbose(" %08x", get_feature_bits(dev) + verbose(" %02x", get_feature_bits(dev) [dev->desc->feature_len+i]); if (dev->ready) @@ -1000,7 +1080,7 @@ static void handle_output(int fd, unsigned long addr) if (strcmp(vq->dev->name, "console") != 0) verbose("Output to %s\n", vq->dev->name); if (vq->handle_output) - vq->handle_output(fd, vq); + vq->handle_output(fd, vq, false); return; } } @@ -1014,6 +1094,29 @@ static void handle_output(int fd, unsigned long addr) strnlen(from_guest_phys(addr), guest_limit - addr)); } +static void handle_timeout(int fd) +{ + char buf[32]; + struct device *i; + struct virtqueue *vq; + + /* Clear the pipe */ + read(timeoutpipe[0], buf, sizeof(buf)); + + /* Check each device and virtqueue: flush blocked ones. */ + for (i = devices.dev; i; i = i->next) { + for (vq = i->vq; vq; vq = vq->next) { + if (!vq->blocked) + continue; + + vq->vring.used->flags &= ~VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY; + vq->blocked = false; + if (vq->handle_output) + vq->handle_output(fd, vq, true); + } + } +} + /* This is called when the Waker wakes us up: check for incoming file * descriptors. */ static void handle_input(int fd) @@ -1024,16 +1127,20 @@ static void handle_input(int fd) for (;;) { struct device *i; fd_set fds = devices.infds; + int num; + num = select(devices.max_infd+1, &fds, NULL, NULL, &poll); + /* Could get interrupted */ + if (num < 0) + continue; /* If nothing is ready, we're done. */ - if (select(devices.max_infd+1, &fds, NULL, NULL, &poll) == 0) + if (num == 0) break; /* Otherwise, call the device(s) which have readable file * descriptors and a method of handling them. */ for (i = devices.dev; i; i = i->next) { if (i->handle_input && FD_ISSET(i->fd, &fds)) { - int dev_fd; if (i->handle_input(fd, i)) continue; @@ -1043,13 +1150,12 @@ static void handle_input(int fd) * buffers to deliver into. Console also uses * it when it discovers that stdin is closed. */ FD_CLR(i->fd, &devices.infds); - /* Tell waker to ignore it too, by sending a - * negative fd number (-1, since 0 is a valid - * FD number). */ - dev_fd = -i->fd - 1; - write(waker_fd, &dev_fd, sizeof(dev_fd)); } } + + /* Is this the timeout fd? */ + if (FD_ISSET(timeoutpipe[0], &fds)) + handle_timeout(fd); } } @@ -1098,7 +1204,7 @@ static struct lguest_device_desc *new_dev_desc(u16 type) /* Each device descriptor is followed by the description of its virtqueues. We * specify how many descriptors the virtqueue is to have. */ static void add_virtqueue(struct device *dev, unsigned int num_descs, - void (*handle_output)(int fd, struct virtqueue *me)) + void (*handle_output)(int, struct virtqueue *, bool)) { unsigned int pages; struct virtqueue **i, *vq = malloc(sizeof(*vq)); @@ -1114,6 +1220,7 @@ static void add_virtqueue(struct device *dev, unsigned int num_descs, vq->last_avail_idx = 0; vq->dev = dev; vq->inflight = 0; + vq->blocked = false; /* Initialize the configuration. */ vq->config.num = num_descs; @@ -1246,6 +1353,24 @@ static void setup_console(void) } /*:*/ +static void timeout_alarm(int sig) +{ + write(timeoutpipe[1], "", 1); +} + +static void setup_timeout(void) +{ + if (pipe(timeoutpipe) != 0) + err(1, "Creating timeout pipe"); + + if (fcntl(timeoutpipe[1], F_SETFL, + fcntl(timeoutpipe[1], F_GETFL) | O_NONBLOCK) != 0) + err(1, "Making timeout pipe nonblocking"); + + add_device_fd(timeoutpipe[0]); + signal(SIGALRM, timeout_alarm); +} + /*M:010 Inter-guest networking is an interesting area. Simplest is to have a * --sharenet=<name> option which opens or creates a named pipe. This can be * used to send packets to another guest in a 1:1 manner. @@ -1264,10 +1389,25 @@ static void setup_console(void) static u32 str2ip(const char *ipaddr) { - unsigned int byte[4]; + unsigned int b[4]; + + if (sscanf(ipaddr, "%u.%u.%u.%u", &b[0], &b[1], &b[2], &b[3]) != 4) + errx(1, "Failed to parse IP address '%s'", ipaddr); + return (b[0] << 24) | (b[1] << 16) | (b[2] << 8) | b[3]; +} - sscanf(ipaddr, "%u.%u.%u.%u", &byte[0], &byte[1], &byte[2], &byte[3]); - return (byte[0] << 24) | (byte[1] << 16) | (byte[2] << 8) | byte[3]; +static void str2mac(const char *macaddr, unsigned char mac[6]) +{ + unsigned int m[6]; + if (sscanf(macaddr, "%02x:%02x:%02x:%02x:%02x:%02x", + &m[0], &m[1], &m[2], &m[3], &m[4], &m[5]) != 6) + errx(1, "Failed to parse mac address '%s'", macaddr); + mac[0] = m[0]; + mac[1] = m[1]; + mac[2] = m[2]; + mac[3] = m[3]; + mac[4] = m[4]; + mac[5] = m[5]; } /* This code is "adapted" from libbridge: it attaches the Host end of the @@ -1288,6 +1428,7 @@ static void add_to_bridge(int fd, const char *if_name, const char *br_name) errx(1, "interface %s does not exist!", if_name); strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, br_name, IFNAMSIZ); + ifr.ifr_name[IFNAMSIZ-1] = '\0'; ifr.ifr_ifindex = ifidx; if (ioctl(fd, SIOCBRADDIF, &ifr) < 0) err(1, "can't add %s to bridge %s", if_name, br_name); @@ -1296,64 +1437,75 @@ static void add_to_bridge(int fd, const char *if_name, const char *br_name) /* This sets up the Host end of the network device with an IP address, brings * it up so packets will flow, the copies the MAC address into the hwaddr * pointer. */ -static void configure_device(int fd, const char *devname, u32 ipaddr, - unsigned char hwaddr[6]) +static void configure_device(int fd, const char *tapif, u32 ipaddr) { struct ifreq ifr; struct sockaddr_in *sin = (struct sockaddr_in *)&ifr.ifr_addr; - /* Don't read these incantations. Just cut & paste them like I did! */ memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr)); - strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, devname); + strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, tapif); + + /* Don't read these incantations. Just cut & paste them like I did! */ sin->sin_family = AF_INET; sin->sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(ipaddr); if (ioctl(fd, SIOCSIFADDR, &ifr) != 0) - err(1, "Setting %s interface address", devname); + err(1, "Setting %s interface address", tapif); ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_UP; if (ioctl(fd, SIOCSIFFLAGS, &ifr) != 0) - err(1, "Bringing interface %s up", devname); - - /* SIOC stands for Socket I/O Control. G means Get (vs S for Set - * above). IF means Interface, and HWADDR is hardware address. - * Simple! */ - if (ioctl(fd, SIOCGIFHWADDR, &ifr) != 0) - err(1, "getting hw address for %s", devname); - memcpy(hwaddr, ifr.ifr_hwaddr.sa_data, 6); + err(1, "Bringing interface %s up", tapif); } -/*L:195 Our network is a Host<->Guest network. This can either use bridging or - * routing, but the principle is the same: it uses the "tun" device to inject - * packets into the Host as if they came in from a normal network card. We - * just shunt packets between the Guest and the tun device. */ -static void setup_tun_net(const char *arg) +static int get_tun_device(char tapif[IFNAMSIZ]) { - struct device *dev; struct ifreq ifr; - int netfd, ipfd; - u32 ip; - const char *br_name = NULL; - struct virtio_net_config conf; + int netfd; + + /* Start with this zeroed. Messy but sure. */ + memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr)); /* We open the /dev/net/tun device and tell it we want a tap device. A * tap device is like a tun device, only somehow different. To tell * the truth, I completely blundered my way through this code, but it * works now! */ netfd = open_or_die("/dev/net/tun", O_RDWR); - memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr)); - ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_TAP | IFF_NO_PI; + ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_TAP | IFF_NO_PI | IFF_VNET_HDR; strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, "tap%d"); if (ioctl(netfd, TUNSETIFF, &ifr) != 0) err(1, "configuring /dev/net/tun"); + + if (ioctl(netfd, TUNSETOFFLOAD, + TUN_F_CSUM|TUN_F_TSO4|TUN_F_TSO6|TUN_F_TSO_ECN) != 0) + err(1, "Could not set features for tun device"); + /* We don't need checksums calculated for packets coming in this * device: trust us! */ ioctl(netfd, TUNSETNOCSUM, 1); + memcpy(tapif, ifr.ifr_name, IFNAMSIZ); + return netfd; +} + +/*L:195 Our network is a Host<->Guest network. This can either use bridging or + * routing, but the principle is the same: it uses the "tun" device to inject + * packets into the Host as if they came in from a normal network card. We + * just shunt packets between the Guest and the tun device. */ +static void setup_tun_net(char *arg) +{ + struct device *dev; + int netfd, ipfd; + u32 ip = INADDR_ANY; + bool bridging = false; + char tapif[IFNAMSIZ], *p; + struct virtio_net_config conf; + + netfd = get_tun_device(tapif); + /* First we create a new network device. */ dev = new_device("net", VIRTIO_ID_NET, netfd, handle_tun_input); /* Network devices need a receive and a send queue, just like * console. */ - add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, enable_fd); + add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, net_enable_fd); add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, handle_net_output); /* We need a socket to perform the magic network ioctls to bring up the @@ -1364,28 +1516,50 @@ static void setup_tun_net(const char *arg) /* If the command line was --tunnet=bridge:<name> do bridging. */ if (!strncmp(BRIDGE_PFX, arg, strlen(BRIDGE_PFX))) { - ip = INADDR_ANY; - br_name = arg + strlen(BRIDGE_PFX); - add_to_bridge(ipfd, ifr.ifr_name, br_name); - } else /* It is an IP address to set up the device with */ + arg += strlen(BRIDGE_PFX); + bridging = true; + } + + /* A mac address may follow the bridge name or IP address */ + p = strchr(arg, ':'); + if (p) { + str2mac(p+1, conf.mac); + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_MAC); + *p = '\0'; + } + + /* arg is now either an IP address or a bridge name */ + if (bridging) + add_to_bridge(ipfd, tapif, arg); + else ip = str2ip(arg); - /* Set up the tun device, and get the mac address for the interface. */ - configure_device(ipfd, ifr.ifr_name, ip, conf.mac); + /* Set up the tun device. */ + configure_device(ipfd, tapif, ip); - /* Tell Guest what MAC address to use. */ - add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_MAC); add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_F_NOTIFY_ON_EMPTY); + /* Expect Guest to handle everything except UFO */ + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_CSUM); + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_CSUM); + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO4); + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO6); + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_ECN); + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_TSO4); + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_TSO6); + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_ECN); set_config(dev, sizeof(conf), &conf); /* We don't need the socket any more; setup is done. */ close(ipfd); - verbose("device %u: tun net %u.%u.%u.%u\n", - devices.device_num++, - (u8)(ip>>24),(u8)(ip>>16),(u8)(ip>>8),(u8)ip); - if (br_name) - verbose("attached to bridge: %s\n", br_name); + devices.device_num++; + + if (bridging) + verbose("device %u: tun %s attached to bridge: %s\n", + devices.device_num, tapif, arg); + else + verbose("device %u: tun %s: %s\n", + devices.device_num, tapif, arg); } /* Our block (disk) device should be really simple: the Guest asks for a block @@ -1550,7 +1724,7 @@ static bool handle_io_finish(int fd, struct device *dev) } /* When the Guest submits some I/O, we just need to wake the I/O thread. */ -static void handle_virtblk_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq) +static void handle_virtblk_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout) { struct vblk_info *vblk = vq->dev->priv; char c = 0; @@ -1621,6 +1795,64 @@ static void setup_block_file(const char *filename) verbose("device %u: virtblock %llu sectors\n", devices.device_num, le64_to_cpu(conf.capacity)); } + +/* Our random number generator device reads from /dev/random into the Guest's + * input buffers. The usual case is that the Guest doesn't want random numbers + * and so has no buffers although /dev/random is still readable, whereas + * console is the reverse. + * + * The same logic applies, however. */ +static bool handle_rng_input(int fd, struct device *dev) +{ + int len; + unsigned int head, in_num, out_num, totlen = 0; + struct iovec iov[dev->vq->vring.num]; + + /* First we need a buffer from the Guests's virtqueue. */ + head = get_vq_desc(dev->vq, iov, &out_num, &in_num); + + /* If they're not ready for input, stop listening to this file + * descriptor. We'll start again once they add an input buffer. */ + if (head == dev->vq->vring.num) + return false; + + if (out_num) + errx(1, "Output buffers in rng?"); + + /* This is why we convert to iovecs: the readv() call uses them, and so + * it reads straight into the Guest's buffer. We loop to make sure we + * fill it. */ + while (!iov_empty(iov, in_num)) { + len = readv(dev->fd, iov, in_num); + if (len <= 0) + err(1, "Read from /dev/random gave %i", len); + iov_consume(iov, in_num, len); + totlen += len; + } + + /* Tell the Guest about the new input. */ + add_used_and_trigger(fd, dev->vq, head, totlen); + + /* Everything went OK! */ + return true; +} + +/* And this creates a "hardware" random number device for the Guest. */ +static void setup_rng(void) +{ + struct device *dev; + int fd; + + fd = open_or_die("/dev/random", O_RDONLY); + + /* The device responds to return from I/O thread. */ + dev = new_device("rng", VIRTIO_ID_RNG, fd, handle_rng_input); + + /* The device has one virtqueue, where the Guest places inbufs. */ + add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, enable_fd); + + verbose("device %u: rng\n", devices.device_num++); +} /* That's the end of device setup. */ /*L:230 Reboot is pretty easy: clean up and exec() the Launcher afresh. */ @@ -1628,11 +1860,12 @@ static void __attribute__((noreturn)) restart_guest(void) { unsigned int i; - /* Closing pipes causes the Waker thread and io_threads to die, and - * closing /dev/lguest cleans up the Guest. Since we don't track all - * open fds, we simply close everything beyond stderr. */ + /* Since we don't track all open fds, we simply close everything beyond + * stderr. */ for (i = 3; i < FD_SETSIZE; i++) close(i); + + /* The exec automatically gets rid of the I/O and Waker threads. */ execv(main_args[0], main_args); err(1, "Could not exec %s", main_args[0]); } @@ -1663,7 +1896,7 @@ static void __attribute__((noreturn)) run_guest(int lguest_fd) /* ERESTART means that we need to reboot the guest */ } else if (errno == ERESTART) { restart_guest(); - /* EAGAIN means the Waker wanted us to look at some input. + /* EAGAIN means a signal (timeout). * Anything else means a bug or incompatible change. */ } else if (errno != EAGAIN) err(1, "Running guest failed"); @@ -1691,13 +1924,14 @@ static struct option opts[] = { { "verbose", 0, NULL, 'v' }, { "tunnet", 1, NULL, 't' }, { "block", 1, NULL, 'b' }, + { "rng", 0, NULL, 'r' }, { "initrd", 1, NULL, 'i' }, { NULL }, }; static void usage(void) { errx(1, "Usage: lguest [--verbose] " - "[--tunnet=(<ipaddr>|bridge:<bridgename>)\n" + "[--tunnet=(<ipaddr>:<macaddr>|bridge:<bridgename>:<macaddr>)\n" "|--block=<filename>|--initrd=<filename>]...\n" "<mem-in-mb> vmlinux [args...]"); } @@ -1765,6 +1999,9 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) case 'b': setup_block_file(optarg); break; + case 'r': + setup_rng(); + break; case 'i': initrd_name = optarg; break; @@ -1783,6 +2020,9 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) /* We always have a console device */ setup_console(); + /* We can timeout waiting for Guest network transmit. */ + setup_timeout(); + /* Now we load the kernel */ start = load_kernel(open_or_die(argv[optind+1], O_RDONLY)); @@ -1826,10 +2066,10 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) * /dev/lguest file descriptor. */ lguest_fd = tell_kernel(pgdir, start); - /* We fork off a child process, which wakes the Launcher whenever one - * of the input file descriptors needs attention. We call this the - * Waker, and we'll cover it in a moment. */ - waker_fd = setup_waker(lguest_fd); + /* We clone off a thread, which wakes the Launcher whenever one of the + * input file descriptors needs attention. We call this the Waker, and + * we'll cover it in a moment. */ + setup_waker(lguest_fd); /* Finally, run the Guest. This doesn't return. */ run_guest(lguest_fd); diff --git a/Documentation/local_ops.txt b/Documentation/local_ops.txt index 4269a1105b37..f4f8b1c6c8ba 100644 --- a/Documentation/local_ops.txt +++ b/Documentation/local_ops.txt @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ It can be done by slightly modifying the standard atomic operations : only their UP variant must be kept. It typically means removing LOCK prefix (on i386 and x86_64) and any SMP sychronization barrier. If the architecture does not have a different behavior between SMP and UP, including asm-generic/local.h -in your archtecture's local.h is sufficient. +in your architecture's local.h is sufficient. The local_t type is defined as an opaque signed long by embedding an atomic_long_t inside a structure. This is made so a cast from this type to a diff --git a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..123b6edd7f18 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +Copyright (c) 2003-2008 QLogic Corporation +QLogic Linux Networking HBA Driver + +This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be +distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file. +You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the +GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software +Foundation (version 2 or a later version). + +You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file +under the following terms: + + 1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable), + must retain the above copyright notice, this list of + conditions and the following disclaimer. + + 2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above + copyright notice, this list of conditions and the + following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other + materials provided with the distribution. + + 3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to + endorse or promote products derived from this software + without specific prior written permission + +REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE, +THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY +EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE +IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR +BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, +EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED +TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, +DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON +ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, +OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY +OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. + +USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT +CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR +OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT, +TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN +ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN +COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM. + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/Makefile b/Documentation/networking/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6d8af1ac56c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := ifenslave + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt index 7fa7fe71d7a8..688dfe1e6b70 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt @@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ xmit_hash_policy in environments where a layer3 gateway device is required to reach most destinations. - This algorithm is 802.3ad complient. + This algorithm is 802.3ad compliant. layer3+4 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can.txt b/Documentation/networking/can.txt index 641d2afacffa..2035bc4932f2 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/can.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/can.txt @@ -35,8 +35,9 @@ This file contains 6.1 general settings 6.2 local loopback of sent frames 6.3 CAN controller hardware filters - 6.4 currently supported CAN hardware - 6.5 todo + 6.4 The virtual CAN driver (vcan) + 6.5 currently supported CAN hardware + 6.6 todo 7 Credits @@ -186,7 +187,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: The Linux network devices (by default) just can handle the transmission and reception of media dependent frames. Due to the - arbritration on the CAN bus the transmission of a low prio CAN-ID + arbitration on the CAN bus the transmission of a low prio CAN-ID may be delayed by the reception of a high prio CAN frame. To reflect the correct* traffic on the node the loopback of the sent data has to be performed right after a successful transmission. If @@ -481,7 +482,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: - stats_timer: To calculate the Socket CAN core statistics (e.g. current/maximum frames per second) this 1 second timer is invoked at can.ko module start time by default. This timer can be - disabled by using stattimer=0 on the module comandline. + disabled by using stattimer=0 on the module commandline. - debug: (removed since SocketCAN SVN r546) @@ -584,7 +585,42 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: @133MHz with four SJA1000 CAN controllers from 2002 under heavy bus load without any problems ... - 6.4 currently supported CAN hardware (September 2007) + 6.4 The virtual CAN driver (vcan) + + Similar to the network loopback devices, vcan offers a virtual local + CAN interface. A full qualified address on CAN consists of + + - a unique CAN Identifier (CAN ID) + - the CAN bus this CAN ID is transmitted on (e.g. can0) + + so in common use cases more than one virtual CAN interface is needed. + + The virtual CAN interfaces allow the transmission and reception of CAN + frames without real CAN controller hardware. Virtual CAN network + devices are usually named 'vcanX', like vcan0 vcan1 vcan2 ... + When compiled as a module the virtual CAN driver module is called vcan.ko + + Since Linux Kernel version 2.6.24 the vcan driver supports the Kernel + netlink interface to create vcan network devices. The creation and + removal of vcan network devices can be managed with the ip(8) tool: + + - Create a virtual CAN network interface: + ip link add type vcan + + - Create a virtual CAN network interface with a specific name 'vcan42': + ip link add dev vcan42 type vcan + + - Remove a (virtual CAN) network interface 'vcan42': + ip link del vcan42 + + The tool 'vcan' from the SocketCAN SVN repository on BerliOS is obsolete. + + Virtual CAN network device creation in older Kernels: + In Linux Kernel versions < 2.6.24 the vcan driver creates 4 vcan + netdevices at module load time by default. This value can be changed + with the module parameter 'numdev'. E.g. 'modprobe vcan numdev=8' + + 6.5 currently supported CAN hardware On the project website http://developer.berlios.de/projects/socketcan there are different drivers available: @@ -603,7 +639,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: Please check the Mailing Lists on the berlios OSS project website. - 6.5 todo (September 2007) + 6.6 todo The configuration interface for CAN network drivers is still an open issue that has not been finalized in the socketcan project. Also the diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c b/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c index a12059886755..1b96ccda3836 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c +++ b/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c @@ -1081,7 +1081,7 @@ static int set_if_addr(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname) } - ipaddr = ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data; + ipaddr = (unsigned char *)ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data; v_print("Interface '%s': set IP %s to %d.%d.%d.%d\n", slave_ifname, ifra[i].desc, ipaddr[0], ipaddr[1], ipaddr[2], ipaddr[3]); diff --git a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt index d391ea631141..4caa0e314cc2 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt @@ -24,4 +24,56 @@ netif_{start|stop|wake}_subqueue() functions to manage each queue while the device is still operational. netdev->queue_lock is still used when the device comes online or when it's completely shut down (unregister_netdev(), etc.). -Author: Peter P. Waskiewicz Jr. <peter.p.waskiewicz.jr@intel.com> + +Section 2: Qdisc support for multiqueue devices + +----------------------------------------------- + +Currently two qdiscs are optimized for multiqueue devices. The first is the +default pfifo_fast qdisc. This qdisc supports one qdisc per hardware queue. +A new round-robin qdisc, sch_multiq also supports multiple hardware queues. The +qdisc is responsible for classifying the skb's and then directing the skb's to +bands and queues based on the value in skb->queue_mapping. Use this field in +the base driver to determine which queue to send the skb to. + +sch_multiq has been added for hardware that wishes to avoid head-of-line +blocking. It will cycle though the bands and verify that the hardware queue +associated with the band is not stopped prior to dequeuing a packet. + +On qdisc load, the number of bands is based on the number of queues on the +hardware. Once the association is made, any skb with skb->queue_mapping set, +will be queued to the band associated with the hardware queue. + + +Section 3: Brief howto using MULTIQ for multiqueue devices +--------------------------------------------------------------- + +The userspace command 'tc,' part of the iproute2 package, is used to configure +qdiscs. To add the MULTIQ qdisc to your network device, assuming the device +is called eth0, run the following command: + +# tc qdisc add dev eth0 root handle 1: multiq + +The qdisc will allocate the number of bands to equal the number of queues that +the device reports, and bring the qdisc online. Assuming eth0 has 4 Tx +queues, the band mapping would look like: + +band 0 => queue 0 +band 1 => queue 1 +band 2 => queue 2 +band 3 => queue 3 + +Traffic will begin flowing through each queue based on either the simple_tx_hash +function or based on netdev->select_queue() if you have it defined. + +The behavior of tc filters remains the same. However a new tc action, +skbedit, has been added. Assuming you wanted to route all traffic to a +specific host, for example 192.168.0.3, through a specific queue you could use +this action and establish a filter such as: + +tc filter add dev eth0 parent 1: protocol ip prio 1 u32 \ + match ip dst 192.168.0.3 \ + action skbedit queue_mapping 3 + +Author: Alexander Duyck <alexander.h.duyck@intel.com> +Original Author: Peter P. Waskiewicz Jr. <peter.p.waskiewicz.jr@intel.com> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt index db0cd5169581..07c53d596035 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ just one call to mmap is needed: mmap(0, size, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, fd, 0); If tp_frame_size is a divisor of tp_block_size frames will be -contiguosly spaced by tp_frame_size bytes. If not, each +contiguously spaced by tp_frame_size bytes. If not, each tp_block_size/tp_frame_size frames there will be a gap between the frames. This is because a frame cannot be spawn across two blocks. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0e6e592f4f55 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ +Linux Phonet protocol family +============================ + +Introduction +------------ + +Phonet is a packet protocol used by Nokia cellular modems for both IPC +and RPC. With the Linux Phonet socket family, Linux host processes can +receive and send messages from/to the modem, or any other external +device attached to the modem. The modem takes care of routing. + +Phonet packets can be exchanged through various hardware connections +depending on the device, such as: + - USB with the CDC Phonet interface, + - infrared, + - Bluetooth, + - an RS232 serial port (with a dedicated "FBUS" line discipline), + - the SSI bus with some TI OMAP processors. + + +Packets format +-------------- + +Phonet packets have a common header as follows: + + struct phonethdr { + uint8_t pn_media; /* Media type (link-layer identifier) */ + uint8_t pn_rdev; /* Receiver device ID */ + uint8_t pn_sdev; /* Sender device ID */ + uint8_t pn_res; /* Resource ID or function */ + uint16_t pn_length; /* Big-endian message byte length (minus 6) */ + uint8_t pn_robj; /* Receiver object ID */ + uint8_t pn_sobj; /* Sender object ID */ + }; + +On Linux, the link-layer header includes the pn_media byte (see below). +The next 7 bytes are part of the network-layer header. + +The device ID is split: the 6 higher-order bits consitute the device +address, while the 2 lower-order bits are used for multiplexing, as are +the 8-bit object identifiers. As such, Phonet can be considered as a +network layer with 6 bits of address space and 10 bits for transport +protocol (much like port numbers in IP world). + +The modem always has address number zero. All other device have a their +own 6-bit address. + + +Link layer +---------- + +Phonet links are always point-to-point links. The link layer header +consists of a single Phonet media type byte. It uniquely identifies the +link through which the packet is transmitted, from the modem's +perspective. Each Phonet network device shall prepend and set the media +type byte as appropriate. For convenience, a common phonet_header_ops +link-layer header operations structure is provided. It sets the +media type according to the network device hardware address. + +Linux Phonet network interfaces support a dedicated link layer packets +type (ETH_P_PHONET) which is out of the Ethernet type range. They can +only send and receive Phonet packets. + +The virtual TUN tunnel device driver can also be used for Phonet. This +requires IFF_TUN mode, _without_ the IFF_NO_PI flag. In this case, +there is no link-layer header, so there is no Phonet media type byte. + +Note that Phonet interfaces are not allowed to re-order packets, so +only the (default) Linux FIFO qdisc should be used with them. + + +Network layer +------------- + +The Phonet socket address family maps the Phonet packet header: + + struct sockaddr_pn { + sa_family_t spn_family; /* AF_PHONET */ + uint8_t spn_obj; /* Object ID */ + uint8_t spn_dev; /* Device ID */ + uint8_t spn_resource; /* Resource or function */ + uint8_t spn_zero[...]; /* Padding */ + }; + +The resource field is only used when sending and receiving; +It is ignored by bind() and getsockname(). + + +Low-level datagram protocol +--------------------------- + +Applications can send Phonet messages using the Phonet datagram socket +protocol from the PF_PHONET family. Each socket is bound to one of the +2^10 object IDs available, and can send and receive packets with any +other peer. + + struct sockaddr_pn addr = { .spn_family = AF_PHONET, }; + ssize_t len; + socklen_t addrlen = sizeof(addr); + int fd; + + fd = socket(PF_PHONET, SOCK_DGRAM, 0); + bind(fd, (struct sockaddr *)&addr, sizeof(addr)); + /* ... */ + + sendto(fd, msg, msglen, 0, (struct sockaddr *)&addr, sizeof(addr)); + len = recvfrom(fd, buf, sizeof(buf), 0, + (struct sockaddr *)&addr, &addrlen); + +This protocol follows the SOCK_DGRAM connection-less semantics. +However, connect() and getpeername() are not supported, as they did +not seem useful with Phonet usages (could be added easily). + + +Phonet Pipe protocol +-------------------- + +The Phonet Pipe protocol is a simple sequenced packets protocol +with end-to-end congestion control. It uses the passive listening +socket paradigm. The listening socket is bound to an unique free object +ID. Each listening socket can handle up to 255 simultaneous +connections, one per accept()'d socket. + + int lfd, cfd; + + lfd = socket(PF_PHONET, SOCK_SEQPACKET, PN_PROTO_PIPE); + listen (lfd, INT_MAX); + + /* ... */ + cfd = accept(lfd, NULL, NULL); + for (;;) + { + char buf[...]; + ssize_t len = read(cfd, buf, sizeof(buf)); + + /* ... */ + + write(cfd, msg, msglen); + } + +Connections are established between two endpoints by a "third party" +application. This means that both endpoints are passive; so connect() +is not possible. + +WARNING: +When polling a connected pipe socket for writability, there is an +intrinsic race condition whereby writability might be lost between the +polling and the writing system calls. In this case, the socket will +block until write because possible again, unless non-blocking mode +becomes enabled. + + +The pipe protocol provides two socket options at the SOL_PNPIPE level: + + PNPIPE_ENCAP accepts one integer value (int) of: + + PNPIPE_ENCAP_NONE: The socket operates normally (default). + + PNPIPE_ENCAP_IP: The socket is used as a backend for a virtual IP + interface. This requires CAP_NET_ADMIN capability. GPRS data + support on Nokia modems can use this. Note that the socket cannot + be reliably poll()'d or read() from while in this mode. + + PNPIPE_IFINDEX is a read-only integer value. It contains the + interface index of the network interface created by PNPIPE_ENCAP, + or zero if encapsulation is off. + + +Authors +------- + +Linux Phonet was initially written by Sakari Ailus. +Other contributors include Mikä Liljeberg, Andras Domokos, +Carlos Chinea and Rémi Denis-Courmont. +Copyright (C) 2008 Nokia Corporation. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt b/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a96989a8ff35 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ +Linux wireless regulatory documentation +--------------------------------------- + +This document gives a brief review over how the Linux wireless +regulatory infrastructure works. + +More up to date information can be obtained at the project's web page: + +http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory + +Keeping regulatory domains in userspace +--------------------------------------- + +Due to the dynamic nature of regulatory domains we keep them +in userspace and provide a framework for userspace to upload +to the kernel one regulatory domain to be used as the central +core regulatory domain all wireless devices should adhere to. + +How to get regulatory domains to the kernel +------------------------------------------- + +Userspace gets a regulatory domain in the kernel by having +a userspace agent build it and send it via nl80211. Only +expected regulatory domains will be respected by the kernel. + +A currently available userspace agent which can accomplish this +is CRDA - central regulatory domain agent. Its documented here: + +http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA + +Essentially the kernel will send a udev event when it knows +it needs a new regulatory domain. A udev rule can be put in place +to trigger crda to send the respective regulatory domain for a +specific ISO/IEC 3166 alpha2. + +Below is an example udev rule which can be used: + +# Example file, should be put in /etc/udev/rules.d/regulatory.rules +KERNEL=="regulatory*", ACTION=="change", SUBSYSTEM=="platform", RUN+="/sbin/crda" + +The alpha2 is passed as an environment variable under the variable COUNTRY. + +Who asks for regulatory domains? +-------------------------------- + +* Users + +Users can use iw: + +http://wireless.kernel.org/en/users/Documentation/iw + +An example: + + # set regulatory domain to "Costa Rica" + iw reg set CR + +This will request the kernel to set the regulatory domain to +the specificied alpha2. The kernel in turn will then ask userspace +to provide a regulatory domain for the alpha2 specified by the user +by sending a uevent. + +* Wireless subsystems for Country Information elements + +The kernel will send a uevent to inform userspace a new +regulatory domain is required. More on this to be added +as its integration is added. + +* Drivers + +If drivers determine they need a specific regulatory domain +set they can inform the wireless core using regulatory_hint(). +They have two options -- they either provide an alpha2 so that +crda can provide back a regulatory domain for that country or +they can build their own regulatory domain based on internal +custom knowledge so the wireless core can respect it. + +*Most* drivers will rely on the first mechanism of providing a +regulatory hint with an alpha2. For these drivers there is an additional +check that can be used to ensure compliance based on custom EEPROM +regulatory data. This additional check can be used by drivers by +registering on its struct wiphy a reg_notifier() callback. This notifier +is called when the core's regulatory domain has been changed. The driver +can use this to review the changes made and also review who made them +(driver, user, country IE) and determine what to allow based on its +internal EEPROM data. Devices drivers wishing to be capable of world +roaming should use this callback. More on world roaming will be +added to this document when its support is enabled. + +Device drivers who provide their own built regulatory domain +do not need a callback as the channels registered by them are +the only ones that will be allowed and therefore *additional* +cannels cannot be enabled. + +Example code - drivers hinting an alpha2: +------------------------------------------ + +This example comes from the zd1211rw device driver. You can start +by having a mapping of your device's EEPROM country/regulatory +domain value to to a specific alpha2 as follows: + +static struct zd_reg_alpha2_map reg_alpha2_map[] = { + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_FCC, "US" }, + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_IC, "CA" }, + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_ETSI, "DE" }, /* Generic ETSI, use most restrictive */ + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_JAPAN, "JP" }, + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_JAPAN_ADD, "JP" }, + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_SPAIN, "ES" }, + { ZD_REGDOMAIN_FRANCE, "FR" }, + +Then you can define a routine to map your read EEPROM value to an alpha2, +as follows: + +static int zd_reg2alpha2(u8 regdomain, char *alpha2) +{ + unsigned int i; + struct zd_reg_alpha2_map *reg_map; + for (i = 0; i < ARRAY_SIZE(reg_alpha2_map); i++) { + reg_map = ®_alpha2_map[i]; + if (regdomain == reg_map->reg) { + alpha2[0] = reg_map->alpha2[0]; + alpha2[1] = reg_map->alpha2[1]; + return 0; + } + } + return 1; +} + +Lastly, you can then hint to the core of your discovered alpha2, if a match +was found. You need to do this after you have registered your wiphy. You +are expected to do this during initialization. + + r = zd_reg2alpha2(mac->regdomain, alpha2); + if (!r) + regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, alpha2, NULL); + +Example code - drivers providing a built in regulatory domain: +-------------------------------------------------------------- + +If you have regulatory information you can obtain from your +driver and you *need* to use this we let you build a regulatory domain +structure and pass it to the wireless core. To do this you should +kmalloc() a structure big enough to hold your regulatory domain +structure and you should then fill it with your data. Finally you simply +call regulatory_hint() with the regulatory domain structure in it. + +Bellow is a simple example, with a regulatory domain cached using the stack. +Your implementation may vary (read EEPROM cache instead, for example). + +Example cache of some regulatory domain + +struct ieee80211_regdomain mydriver_jp_regdom = { + .n_reg_rules = 3, + .alpha2 = "JP", + //.alpha2 = "99", /* If I have no alpha2 to map it to */ + .reg_rules = { + /* IEEE 802.11b/g, channels 1..14 */ + REG_RULE(2412-20, 2484+20, 40, 6, 20, 0), + /* IEEE 802.11a, channels 34..48 */ + REG_RULE(5170-20, 5240+20, 40, 6, 20, + NL80211_RRF_PASSIVE_SCAN), + /* IEEE 802.11a, channels 52..64 */ + REG_RULE(5260-20, 5320+20, 40, 6, 20, + NL80211_RRF_NO_IBSS | + NL80211_RRF_DFS), + } +}; + +Then in some part of your code after your wiphy has been registered: + + int r; + struct ieee80211_regdomain *rd; + int size_of_regd; + int num_rules = mydriver_jp_regdom.n_reg_rules; + unsigned int i; + + size_of_regd = sizeof(struct ieee80211_regdomain) + + (num_rules * sizeof(struct ieee80211_reg_rule)); + + rd = kzalloc(size_of_regd, GFP_KERNEL); + if (!rd) + return -ENOMEM; + + memcpy(rd, &mydriver_jp_regdom, sizeof(struct ieee80211_regdomain)); + + for (i=0; i < num_rules; i++) { + memcpy(&rd->reg_rules[i], &mydriver_jp_regdom.reg_rules[i], + sizeof(struct ieee80211_reg_rule)); + } + r = regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, NULL, rd); + if (r) { + kfree(rd); + return r; + } + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt b/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt index 01e716d185f4..dcadf6f88e34 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt @@ -4,26 +4,27 @@ The "enviromental" rules for authors of any new tc actions are: 1) If you stealeth or borroweth any packet thou shalt be branching from the righteous path and thou shalt cloneth. -For example if your action queues a packet to be processed later -or intentionaly branches by redirecting a packet then you need to +For example if your action queues a packet to be processed later, +or intentionally branches by redirecting a packet, then you need to clone the packet. + There are certain fields in the skb tc_verd that need to be reset so we -avoid loops etc. A few are generic enough so much so that skb_act_clone() -resets them for you. So invoke skb_act_clone() rather than skb_clone() +avoid loops, etc. A few are generic enough that skb_act_clone() +resets them for you, so invoke skb_act_clone() rather than skb_clone(). 2) If you munge any packet thou shalt call pskb_expand_head in the case someone else is referencing the skb. After that you "own" the skb. You must also tell us if it is ok to munge the packet (TC_OK2MUNGE), this way any action downstream can stomp on the packet. -3) dropping packets you dont own is a nono. You simply return +3) Dropping packets you don't own is a no-no. You simply return TC_ACT_SHOT to the caller and they will drop it. The "enviromental" rules for callers of actions (qdiscs etc) are: -*) thou art responsible for freeing anything returned as being +*) Thou art responsible for freeing anything returned as being TC_ACT_SHOT/STOLEN/QUEUED. If none of TC_ACT_SHOT/STOLEN/QUEUED is -returned then all is great and you dont need to do anything. +returned, then all is great and you don't need to do anything. Post on netdev if something is unclear. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt b/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7b5996d9357e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +Transparent proxy support +========================= + +This feature adds Linux 2.2-like transparent proxy support to current kernels. +To use it, enable NETFILTER_TPROXY, the socket match and the TPROXY target in +your kernel config. You will need policy routing too, so be sure to enable that +as well. + + +1. Making non-local sockets work +================================ + +The idea is that you identify packets with destination address matching a local +socket on your box, set the packet mark to a certain value, and then match on that +value using policy routing to have those packets delivered locally: + +# iptables -t mangle -N DIVERT +# iptables -t mangle -A PREROUTING -p tcp -m socket -j DIVERT +# iptables -t mangle -A DIVERT -j MARK --set-mark 1 +# iptables -t mangle -A DIVERT -j ACCEPT + +# ip rule add fwmark 1 lookup 100 +# ip route add local 0.0.0.0/0 dev lo table 100 + +Because of certain restrictions in the IPv4 routing output code you'll have to +modify your application to allow it to send datagrams _from_ non-local IP +addresses. All you have to do is enable the (SOL_IP, IP_TRANSPARENT) socket +option before calling bind: + +fd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0); +/* - 8< -*/ +int value = 1; +setsockopt(fd, SOL_IP, IP_TRANSPARENT, &value, sizeof(value)); +/* - 8< -*/ +name.sin_family = AF_INET; +name.sin_port = htons(0xCAFE); +name.sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(0xDEADBEEF); +bind(fd, &name, sizeof(name)); + +A trivial patch for netcat is available here: +http://people.netfilter.org/hidden/tproxy/netcat-ip_transparent-support.patch + + +2. Redirecting traffic +====================== + +Transparent proxying often involves "intercepting" traffic on a router. This is +usually done with the iptables REDIRECT target; however, there are serious +limitations of that method. One of the major issues is that it actually +modifies the packets to change the destination address -- which might not be +acceptable in certain situations. (Think of proxying UDP for example: you won't +be able to find out the original destination address. Even in case of TCP +getting the original destination address is racy.) + +The 'TPROXY' target provides similar functionality without relying on NAT. Simply +add rules like this to the iptables ruleset above: + +# iptables -t mangle -A PREROUTING -p tcp --dport 80 -j TPROXY \ + --tproxy-mark 0x1/0x1 --on-port 50080 + +Note that for this to work you'll have to modify the proxy to enable (SOL_IP, +IP_TRANSPARENT) for the listening socket. + + +3. Iptables extensions +====================== + +To use tproxy you'll need to have the 'socket' and 'TPROXY' modules +compiled for iptables. A patched version of iptables is available +here: http://git.balabit.hu/?p=bazsi/iptables-tproxy.git + + +4. Application support +====================== + +4.1. Squid +---------- + +Squid 3.HEAD has support built-in. To use it, pass +'--enable-linux-netfilter' to configure and set the 'tproxy' option on +the HTTP listener you redirect traffic to with the TPROXY iptables +target. + +For more information please consult the following page on the Squid +wiki: http://wiki.squid-cache.org/Features/Tproxy4 diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/Makefile b/Documentation/pcmcia/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..accde871ae77 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := crc32hash + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) + +HOSTCFLAGS_crc32hash.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c b/Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c index cbc36d299af8..4210e5abab8a 100644 --- a/Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c +++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ int main(int argc, char **argv) { printf("no string passed as argument\n"); return -1; } - result = crc32(argv[1], strlen(argv[1])); + result = crc32((unsigned char const *)argv[1], strlen(argv[1])); printf("0x%x\n", result); return 0; } diff --git a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt index 49adb1a33514..c40866e8b957 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -PM quality of Service interface. +PM Quality Of Service Interface. This interface provides a kernel and user mode interface for registering performance expectations by drivers, subsystems and user space applications on @@ -7,6 +7,11 @@ one of the parameters. Currently we have {cpu_dma_latency, network_latency, network_throughput} as the initial set of pm_qos parameters. +Each parameters have defined units: + * latency: usec + * timeout: usec + * throughput: kbs (kilo bit / sec) + The infrastructure exposes multiple misc device nodes one per implemented parameter. The set of parameters implement is defined by pm_qos_power_init() and pm_qos_params.h. This is done because having the available parameters diff --git a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt index a8686e5a6857..c6cd4956047c 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt @@ -101,6 +101,10 @@ of charge when battery became full/empty". It also could mean "value of charge when battery considered full/empty at given conditions (temperature, age)". I.e. these attributes represents real thresholds, not design values. +CHARGE_COUNTER - the current charge counter (in µAh). This could easily +be negative; there is no empty or full value. It is only useful for +relative, time-based measurements. + ENERGY_FULL, ENERGY_EMPTY - same as above but for energy. CAPACITY - capacity in percents. diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..82b7a43aadba --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,182 @@ +Regulator Consumer Driver Interface +=================================== + +This text describes the regulator interface for consumer device drivers. +Please see overview.txt for a description of the terms used in this text. + + +1. Consumer Regulator Access (static & dynamic drivers) +======================================================= + +A consumer driver can get access to it's supply regulator by calling :- + +regulator = regulator_get(dev, "Vcc"); + +The consumer passes in it's struct device pointer and power supply ID. The core +then finds the correct regulator by consulting a machine specific lookup table. +If the lookup is successful then this call will return a pointer to the struct +regulator that supplies this consumer. + +To release the regulator the consumer driver should call :- + +regulator_put(regulator); + +Consumers can be supplied by more than one regulator e.g. codec consumer with +analog and digital supplies :- + +digital = regulator_get(dev, "Vcc"); /* digital core */ +analog = regulator_get(dev, "Avdd"); /* analog */ + +The regulator access functions regulator_get() and regulator_put() will +usually be called in your device drivers probe() and remove() respectively. + + +2. Regulator Output Enable & Disable (static & dynamic drivers) +==================================================================== + +A consumer can enable it's power supply by calling:- + +int regulator_enable(regulator); + +NOTE: The supply may already be enabled before regulator_enabled() is called. +This may happen if the consumer shares the regulator or the regulator has been +previously enabled by bootloader or kernel board initialization code. + +A consumer can determine if a regulator is enabled by calling :- + +int regulator_is_enabled(regulator); + +This will return > zero when the regulator is enabled. + + +A consumer can disable it's supply when no longer needed by calling :- + +int regulator_disable(regulator); + +NOTE: This may not disable the supply if it's shared with other consumers. The +regulator will only be disabled when the enabled reference count is zero. + +Finally, a regulator can be forcefully disabled in the case of an emergency :- + +int regulator_force_disable(regulator); + +NOTE: this will immediately and forcefully shutdown the regulator output. All +consumers will be powered off. + + +3. Regulator Voltage Control & Status (dynamic drivers) +====================================================== + +Some consumer drivers need to be able to dynamically change their supply +voltage to match system operating points. e.g. CPUfreq drivers can scale +voltage along with frequency to save power, SD drivers may need to select the +correct card voltage, etc. + +Consumers can control their supply voltage by calling :- + +int regulator_set_voltage(regulator, min_uV, max_uV); + +Where min_uV and max_uV are the minimum and maximum acceptable voltages in +microvolts. + +NOTE: this can be called when the regulator is enabled or disabled. If called +when enabled, then the voltage changes instantly, otherwise the voltage +configuration changes and the voltage is physically set when the regulator is +next enabled. + +The regulators configured voltage output can be found by calling :- + +int regulator_get_voltage(regulator); + +NOTE: get_voltage() will return the configured output voltage whether the +regulator is enabled or disabled and should NOT be used to determine regulator +output state. However this can be used in conjunction with is_enabled() to +determine the regulator physical output voltage. + + +4. Regulator Current Limit Control & Status (dynamic drivers) +=========================================================== + +Some consumer drivers need to be able to dynamically change their supply +current limit to match system operating points. e.g. LCD backlight driver can +change the current limit to vary the backlight brightness, USB drivers may want +to set the limit to 500mA when supplying power. + +Consumers can control their supply current limit by calling :- + +int regulator_set_current_limit(regulator, min_uV, max_uV); + +Where min_uA and max_uA are the minimum and maximum acceptable current limit in +microamps. + +NOTE: this can be called when the regulator is enabled or disabled. If called +when enabled, then the current limit changes instantly, otherwise the current +limit configuration changes and the current limit is physically set when the +regulator is next enabled. + +A regulators current limit can be found by calling :- + +int regulator_get_current_limit(regulator); + +NOTE: get_current_limit() will return the current limit whether the regulator +is enabled or disabled and should not be used to determine regulator current +load. + + +5. Regulator Operating Mode Control & Status (dynamic drivers) +============================================================= + +Some consumers can further save system power by changing the operating mode of +their supply regulator to be more efficient when the consumers operating state +changes. e.g. consumer driver is idle and subsequently draws less current + +Regulator operating mode can be changed indirectly or directly. + +Indirect operating mode control. +-------------------------------- +Consumer drivers can request a change in their supply regulator operating mode +by calling :- + +int regulator_set_optimum_mode(struct regulator *regulator, int load_uA); + +This will cause the core to recalculate the total load on the regulator (based +on all it's consumers) and change operating mode (if necessary and permitted) +to best match the current operating load. + +The load_uA value can be determined from the consumers datasheet. e.g.most +datasheets have tables showing the max current consumed in certain situations. + +Most consumers will use indirect operating mode control since they have no +knowledge of the regulator or whether the regulator is shared with other +consumers. + +Direct operating mode control. +------------------------------ +Bespoke or tightly coupled drivers may want to directly control regulator +operating mode depending on their operating point. This can be achieved by +calling :- + +int regulator_set_mode(struct regulator *regulator, unsigned int mode); +unsigned int regulator_get_mode(struct regulator *regulator); + +Direct mode will only be used by consumers that *know* about the regulator and +are not sharing the regulator with other consumers. + + +6. Regulator Events +=================== +Regulators can notify consumers of external events. Events could be received by +consumers under regulator stress or failure conditions. + +Consumers can register interest in regulator events by calling :- + +int regulator_register_notifier(struct regulator *regulator, + struct notifier_block *nb); + +Consumers can uregister interest by calling :- + +int regulator_unregister_notifier(struct regulator *regulator, + struct notifier_block *nb); + +Regulators use the kernel notifier framework to send event to thier interested +consumers. diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c9a35665cf70 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +Regulator Machine Driver Interface +=================================== + +The regulator machine driver interface is intended for board/machine specific +initialisation code to configure the regulator subsystem. Typical things that +machine drivers would do are :- + + 1. Regulator -> Device mapping. + 2. Regulator supply configuration. + 3. Power Domain constraint setting. + + + +1. Regulator -> device mapping +============================== +Consider the following machine :- + + Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V] + | + +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V] + +The drivers for consumers A & B must be mapped to the correct regulator in +order to control their power supply. This mapping can be achieved in machine +initialisation code by calling :- + +int regulator_set_device_supply(const char *regulator, struct device *dev, + const char *supply); + +and is shown with the following code :- + +regulator_set_device_supply("Regulator-1", devB, "Vcc"); +regulator_set_device_supply("Regulator-2", devA, "Vcc"); + +This maps Regulator-1 to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer B and maps Regulator-2 +to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer A. + + +2. Regulator supply configuration. +================================== +Consider the following machine (again) :- + + Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V] + | + +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V] + +Regulator-1 supplies power to Regulator-2. This relationship must be registered +with the core so that Regulator-1 is also enabled when Consumer A enables it's +supply (Regulator-2). + +This relationship can be register with the core via :- + +int regulator_set_supply(const char *regulator, const char *regulator_supply); + +In this example we would use the following code :- + +regulator_set_supply("Regulator-2", "Regulator-1"); + +Relationships can be queried by calling :- + +const char *regulator_get_supply(const char *regulator); + + +3. Power Domain constraint setting. +=================================== +Each power domain within a system has physical constraints on voltage and +current. This must be defined in software so that the power domain is always +operated within specifications. + +Consider the following machine (again) :- + + Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V] + | + +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V] + +This gives us two regulators and two power domains: + + Domain 1: Regulator-2, Consumer B. + Domain 2: Consumer A. + +Constraints can be registered by calling :- + +int regulator_set_platform_constraints(const char *regulator, + struct regulation_constraints *constraints); + +The example is defined as follows :- + +struct regulation_constraints domain_1 = { + .min_uV = 3300000, + .max_uV = 3300000, + .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, +}; + +struct regulation_constraints domain_2 = { + .min_uV = 1800000, + .max_uV = 2000000, + .valid_ops_mask = REGULATOR_CHANGE_VOLTAGE, + .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, +}; + +regulator_set_platform_constraints("Regulator-1", &domain_1); +regulator_set_platform_constraints("Regulator-2", &domain_2); diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bdcb332bd7fb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ +Linux voltage and current regulator framework +============================================= + +About +===== + +This framework is designed to provide a standard kernel interface to control +voltage and current regulators. + +The intention is to allow systems to dynamically control regulator power output +in order to save power and prolong battery life. This applies to both voltage +regulators (where voltage output is controllable) and current sinks (where +current limit is controllable). + +(C) 2008 Wolfson Microelectronics PLC. +Author: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> + + +Nomenclature +============ + +Some terms used in this document:- + + o Regulator - Electronic device that supplies power to other devices. + Most regulators can enable and disable their output whilst + some can control their output voltage and or current. + + Input Voltage -> Regulator -> Output Voltage + + + o PMIC - Power Management IC. An IC that contains numerous regulators + and often contains other susbsystems. + + + o Consumer - Electronic device that is supplied power by a regulator. + Consumers can be classified into two types:- + + Static: consumer does not change it's supply voltage or + current limit. It only needs to enable or disable it's + power supply. It's supply voltage is set by the hardware, + bootloader, firmware or kernel board initialisation code. + + Dynamic: consumer needs to change it's supply voltage or + current limit to meet operation demands. + + + o Power Domain - Electronic circuit that is supplied it's input power by the + output power of a regulator, switch or by another power + domain. + + The supply regulator may be behind a switch(s). i.e. + + Regulator -+-> Switch-1 -+-> Switch-2 --> [Consumer A] + | | + | +-> [Consumer B], [Consumer C] + | + +-> [Consumer D], [Consumer E] + + That is one regulator and three power domains: + + Domain 1: Switch-1, Consumers D & E. + Domain 2: Switch-2, Consumers B & C. + Domain 3: Consumer A. + + and this represents a "supplies" relationship: + + Domain-1 --> Domain-2 --> Domain-3. + + A power domain may have regulators that are supplied power + by other regulators. i.e. + + Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 -+-> [Consumer A] + | + +-> [Consumer B] + + This gives us two regulators and two power domains: + + Domain 1: Regulator-2, Consumer B. + Domain 2: Consumer A. + + and a "supplies" relationship: + + Domain-1 --> Domain-2 + + + o Constraints - Constraints are used to define power levels for performance + and hardware protection. Constraints exist at three levels: + + Regulator Level: This is defined by the regulator hardware + operating parameters and is specified in the regulator + datasheet. i.e. + + - voltage output is in the range 800mV -> 3500mV. + - regulator current output limit is 20mA @ 5V but is + 10mA @ 10V. + + Power Domain Level: This is defined in software by kernel + level board initialisation code. It is used to constrain a + power domain to a particular power range. i.e. + + - Domain-1 voltage is 3300mV + - Domain-2 voltage is 1400mV -> 1600mV + - Domain-3 current limit is 0mA -> 20mA. + + Consumer Level: This is defined by consumer drivers + dynamically setting voltage or current limit levels. + + e.g. a consumer backlight driver asks for a current increase + from 5mA to 10mA to increase LCD illumination. This passes + to through the levels as follows :- + + Consumer: need to increase LCD brightness. Lookup and + request next current mA value in brightness table (the + consumer driver could be used on several different + personalities based upon the same reference device). + + Power Domain: is the new current limit within the domain + operating limits for this domain and system state (e.g. + battery power, USB power) + + Regulator Domains: is the new current limit within the + regulator operating parameters for input/ouput voltage. + + If the regulator request passes all the constraint tests + then the new regulator value is applied. + + +Design +====== + +The framework is designed and targeted at SoC based devices but may also be +relevant to non SoC devices and is split into the following four interfaces:- + + + 1. Consumer driver interface. + + This uses a similar API to the kernel clock interface in that consumer + drivers can get and put a regulator (like they can with clocks atm) and + get/set voltage, current limit, mode, enable and disable. This should + allow consumers complete control over their supply voltage and current + limit. This also compiles out if not in use so drivers can be reused in + systems with no regulator based power control. + + See Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt + + 2. Regulator driver interface. + + This allows regulator drivers to register their regulators and provide + operations to the core. It also has a notifier call chain for propagating + regulator events to clients. + + See Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt + + 3. Machine interface. + + This interface is for machine specific code and allows the creation of + voltage/current domains (with constraints) for each regulator. It can + provide regulator constraints that will prevent device damage through + overvoltage or over current caused by buggy client drivers. It also + allows the creation of a regulator tree whereby some regulators are + supplied by others (similar to a clock tree). + + See Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt + + 4. Userspace ABI. + + The framework also exports a lot of useful voltage/current/opmode data to + userspace via sysfs. This could be used to help monitor device power + consumption and status. + + See Documentation/ABI/testing/regulator-sysfs.txt diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a69050143592 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +Regulator Driver Interface +========================== + +The regulator driver interface is relatively simple and designed to allow +regulator drivers to register their services with the core framework. + + +Registration +============ + +Drivers can register a regulator by calling :- + +struct regulator_dev *regulator_register(struct regulator_desc *regulator_desc, + void *reg_data); + +This will register the regulators capabilities and operations the regulator +core. The core does not touch reg_data (private to regulator driver). + +Regulators can be unregistered by calling :- + +void regulator_unregister(struct regulator_dev *rdev); + + +Regulator Events +================ +Regulators can send events (e.g. over temp, under voltage, etc) to consumer +drivers by calling :- + +int regulator_notifier_call_chain(struct regulator_dev *rdev, + unsigned long event, void *data); diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX index 3be84aa38dfe..29d839ce7327 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX @@ -20,8 +20,6 @@ mpc52xx-device-tree-bindings.txt - MPC5200 Device Tree Bindings ppc_htab.txt - info about the Linux/PPC /proc/ppc_htab entry -SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt - - EST SBC8260 board info smp.txt - use and state info about Linux/PPC on MP machines sound.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt deleted file mode 100644 index e6e9ee0506c3..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,197 +0,0 @@ -Please mail me (Jon Diekema, diekema_jon@si.com or diekema@cideas.com) -if you have questions, comments or corrections. - - * EST SBC8260 Linux memory mapping rules - - http://www.estc.com/ - http://www.estc.com/products/boards/SBC8260-8240_ds.html - - Initial conditions: - ------------------- - - Tasks that need to be perform by the boot ROM before control is - transferred to zImage (compressed Linux kernel): - - - Define the IMMR to 0xf0000000 - - - Initialize the memory controller so that RAM is available at - physical address 0x00000000. On the SBC8260 is this 16M (64M) - SDRAM. - - - The boot ROM should only clear the RAM that it is using. - - The reason for doing this is to enhances the chances of a - successful post mortem on a Linux panic. One of the first - items to examine is the 16k (LOG_BUF_LEN) circular console - buffer called log_buf which is defined in kernel/printk.c. - - - To enhance boot ROM performance, the I-cache can be enabled. - - Date: Mon, 22 May 2000 14:21:10 -0700 - From: Neil Russell <caret@c-side.com> - - LiMon (LInux MONitor) runs with and starts Linux with MMU - off, I-cache enabled, D-cache disabled. The I-cache doesn't - need hints from the MMU to work correctly as the D-cache - does. No D-cache means no special code to handle devices in - the presence of cache (no snooping, etc). The use of the - I-cache means that the monitor can run acceptably fast - directly from ROM, rather than having to copy it to RAM. - - - Build the board information structure (see - include/asm-ppc/est8260.h for its definition) - - - The compressed Linux kernel (zImage) contains a bootstrap loader - that is position independent; you can load it into any RAM, - ROM or FLASH memory address >= 0x00500000 (above 5 MB), or - at its link address of 0x00400000 (4 MB). - - Note: If zImage is loaded at its link address of 0x00400000 (4 MB), - then zImage will skip the step of moving itself to - its link address. - - - Load R3 with the address of the board information structure - - - Transfer control to zImage - - - The Linux console port is SMC1, and the baud rate is controlled - from the bi_baudrate field of the board information structure. - On thing to keep in mind when picking the baud rate, is that - there is no flow control on the SMC ports. I would stick - with something safe and standard like 19200. - - On the EST SBC8260, the SMC1 port is on the COM1 connector of - the board. - - - EST SBC8260 defaults: - --------------------- - - Chip - Memory Sel Bus Use - --------------------- --- --- ---------------------------------- - 0x00000000-0x03FFFFFF CS2 60x (16M or 64M)/64M SDRAM - 0x04000000-0x04FFFFFF CS4 local 4M/16M SDRAM (soldered to the board) - 0x21000000-0x21000000 CS7 60x 1B/64K Flash present detect (from the flash SIMM) - 0x21000001-0x21000001 CS7 60x 1B/64K Switches (read) and LEDs (write) - 0x22000000-0x2200FFFF CS5 60x 8K/64K EEPROM - 0xFC000000-0xFCFFFFFF CS6 60x 2M/16M flash (8 bits wide, soldered to the board) - 0xFE000000-0xFFFFFFFF CS0 60x 4M/16M flash (SIMM) - - Notes: - ------ - - - The chip selects can map 32K blocks and up (powers of 2) - - - The SDRAM machine can handled up to 128Mbytes per chip select - - - Linux uses the 60x bus memory (the SDRAM DIMM) for the - communications buffers. - - - BATs can map 128K-256Mbytes each. There are four data BATs and - four instruction BATs. Generally the data and instruction BATs - are mapped the same. - - - The IMMR must be set above the kernel virtual memory addresses, - which start at 0xC0000000. Otherwise, the kernel may crash as - soon as you start any threads or processes due to VM collisions - in the kernel or user process space. - - - Details from Dan Malek <dan_malek@mvista.com> on 10/29/1999: - - The user application virtual space consumes the first 2 Gbytes - (0x00000000 to 0x7FFFFFFF). The kernel virtual text starts at - 0xC0000000, with data following. There is a "protection hole" - between the end of kernel data and the start of the kernel - dynamically allocated space, but this space is still within - 0xCxxxxxxx. - - Obviously the kernel can't map any physical addresses 1:1 in - these ranges. - - - Details from Dan Malek <dan_malek@mvista.com> on 5/19/2000: - - During the early kernel initialization, the kernel virtual - memory allocator is not operational. Prior to this KVM - initialization, we choose to map virtual to physical addresses - 1:1. That is, the kernel virtual address exactly matches the - physical address on the bus. These mappings are typically done - in arch/ppc/kernel/head.S, or arch/ppc/mm/init.c. Only - absolutely necessary mappings should be done at this time, for - example board control registers or a serial uart. Normal device - driver initialization should map resources later when necessary. - - Although platform dependent, and certainly the case for embedded - 8xx, traditionally memory is mapped at physical address zero, - and I/O devices above physical address 0x80000000. The lowest - and highest (above 0xf0000000) I/O addresses are traditionally - used for devices or registers we need to map during kernel - initialization and prior to KVM operation. For this reason, - and since it followed prior PowerPC platform examples, I chose - to map the embedded 8xx kernel to the 0xc0000000 virtual address. - This way, we can enable the MMU to map the kernel for proper - operation, and still map a few windows before the KVM is operational. - - On some systems, you could possibly run the kernel at the - 0x80000000 or any other virtual address. It just depends upon - mapping that must be done prior to KVM operational. You can never - map devices or kernel spaces that overlap with the user virtual - space. This is why default IMMR mapping used by most BDM tools - won't work. They put the IMMR at something like 0x10000000 or - 0x02000000 for example. You simply can't map these addresses early - in the kernel, and continue proper system operation. - - The embedded 8xx/82xx kernel is mature enough that all you should - need to do is map the IMMR someplace at or above 0xf0000000 and it - should boot far enough to get serial console messages and KGDB - connected on any platform. There are lots of other subtle memory - management design features that you simply don't need to worry - about. If you are changing functions related to MMU initialization, - you are likely breaking things that are known to work and are - heading down a path of disaster and frustration. Your changes - should be to make the flexibility of the processor fit Linux, - not force arbitrary and non-workable memory mappings into Linux. - - - You don't want to change KERNELLOAD or KERNELBASE, otherwise the - virtual memory and MMU code will get confused. - - arch/ppc/Makefile:KERNELLOAD = 0xc0000000 - - include/asm-ppc/page.h:#define PAGE_OFFSET 0xc0000000 - include/asm-ppc/page.h:#define KERNELBASE PAGE_OFFSET - - - RAM is at physical address 0x00000000, and gets mapped to - virtual address 0xC0000000 for the kernel. - - - Physical addresses used by the Linux kernel: - -------------------------------------------- - - 0x00000000-0x3FFFFFFF 1GB reserved for RAM - 0xF0000000-0xF001FFFF 128K IMMR 64K used for dual port memory, - 64K for 8260 registers - - - Logical addresses used by the Linux kernel: - ------------------------------------------- - - 0xF0000000-0xFFFFFFFF 256M BAT0 (IMMR: dual port RAM, registers) - 0xE0000000-0xEFFFFFFF 256M BAT1 (I/O space for custom boards) - 0xC0000000-0xCFFFFFFF 256M BAT2 (RAM) - 0xD0000000-0xDFFFFFFF 256M BAT3 (if RAM > 256MByte) - - - EST SBC8260 Linux mapping: - -------------------------- - - DBAT0, IBAT0, cache inhibited: - - Chip - Memory Sel Use - --------------------- --- --------------------------------- - 0xF0000000-0xF001FFFF n/a IMMR: dual port RAM, registers - - DBAT1, IBAT1, cache inhibited: - diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt index 99514ced82c5..de4063cb4fdc 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ it with special cases. a 64-bit platform. d) request and get assigned a platform number (see PLATFORM_* - constants in include/asm-powerpc/processor.h + constants in arch/powerpc/include/asm/processor.h 32-bit embedded kernels: @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ the block to RAM before passing it to the kernel. --------- The kernel is entered with r3 pointing to an area of memory that is - roughly described in include/asm-powerpc/prom.h by the structure + roughly described in arch/powerpc/include/asm/prom.h by the structure boot_param_header: struct boot_param_header { @@ -708,7 +708,7 @@ device or bus to be described by the device tree. In general, the format of an address for a device is defined by the parent bus type, based on the #address-cells and #size-cells properties. Note that the parent's parent definitions of #address-cells -and #size-cells are not inhereted so every node with children must specify +and #size-cells are not inherited so every node with children must specify them. The kernel requires the root node to have those properties defining addresses format for devices directly mapped on the processor bus. @@ -1777,7 +1777,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model. Xilinx uartlite devices are simple fixed speed serial ports. - Requred properties: + Required properties: - current-speed : Baud rate of uartlite v) Xilinx hwicap @@ -1799,7 +1799,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model. Xilinx UART 16550 devices are very similar to the NS16550 but with different register spacing and an offset from the base address. - Requred properties: + Required properties: - clock-frequency : Frequency of the clock input - reg-offset : A value of 3 is required - reg-shift : A value of 2 is required @@ -1953,7 +1953,7 @@ prefixed with the string "marvell,", for Marvell Technology Group Ltd. 1) The /system-controller node This node is used to represent the system-controller and must be - present when the system uses a system contller chip. The top-level + present when the system uses a system controller chip. The top-level system-controller node contains information that is global to all devices within the system controller chip. The node name begins with "system-controller" followed by the unit address, which is diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt index b35f3482e3e4..2ea76d9d137c 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt @@ -7,6 +7,15 @@ Currently defined compatibles: - fsl,cpm2-scc-uart - fsl,qe-uart +Modem control lines connected to GPIO controllers are listed in the gpios +property as described in booting-without-of.txt, section IX.1 in the following +order: + +CTS, RTS, DCD, DSR, DTR, and RI. + +The gpios property is optional and can be left out when control lines are +not used. + Example: serial@11a00 { @@ -18,4 +27,6 @@ Example: interrupt-parent = <&PIC>; fsl,cpm-brg = <1>; fsl,cpm-command = <00800000>; + gpios = <&gpio_c 15 0 + &gpio_d 29 0>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt index df7afe43d462..9d4e33df624c 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ error. Given an arbitrary address, the routine pci_get_device_by_addr() will find the pci device associated with that address (if any). -The default include/asm-powerpc/io.h macros readb(), inb(), insb(), +The default arch/powerpc/include/asm/io.h macros readb(), inb(), insb(), etc. include a check to see if the i/o read returned all-0xff's. If so, these make a call to eeh_dn_check_failure(), which in turn asks the firmware if the all-ff's value is the sign of a true EEH diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt index 896266432d33..06da4d4b44f9 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Although it is not recommended, you can specify '0' in the soc.model field to skip matching SOCs altogether. The 'model' field is a 16-bit number that matches the actual SOC. The -'major' and 'minor' fields are the major and minor revision numbrs, +'major' and 'minor' fields are the major and minor revision numbers, respectively, of the SOC. For example, to match the 8323, revision 1.0: diff --git a/Documentation/rfkill.txt b/Documentation/rfkill.txt index 0843ed0163a5..b65f0799df48 100644 --- a/Documentation/rfkill.txt +++ b/Documentation/rfkill.txt @@ -341,6 +341,8 @@ key that does nothing by itself, as well as any hot key that is type-specific 3.1 Guidelines for wireless device drivers ------------------------------------------ +(in this text, rfkill->foo means the foo field of struct rfkill). + 1. Each independent transmitter in a wireless device (usually there is only one transmitter per device) should have a SINGLE rfkill class attached to it. @@ -363,6 +365,33 @@ This rule exists because users of the rfkill subsystem expect to get (and set, when possible) the overall transmitter rfkill state, not of a particular rfkill line. +5. The wireless device driver MUST NOT leave the transmitter enabled during +suspend and hibernation unless: + + 5.1. The transmitter has to be enabled for some sort of functionality + like wake-on-wireless-packet or autonomous packed forwarding in a mesh + network, and that functionality is enabled for this suspend/hibernation + cycle. + +AND + + 5.2. The device was not on a user-requested BLOCKED state before + the suspend (i.e. the driver must NOT unblock a device, not even + to support wake-on-wireless-packet or remain in the mesh). + +In other words, there is absolutely no allowed scenario where a driver can +automatically take action to unblock a rfkill controller (obviously, this deals +with scenarios where soft-blocking or both soft and hard blocking is happening. +Scenarios where hardware rfkill lines are the only ones blocking the +transmitter are outside of this rule, since the wireless device driver does not +control its input hardware rfkill lines in the first place). + +6. During resume, rfkill will try to restore its previous state. + +7. After a rfkill class is suspended, it will *not* call rfkill->toggle_radio +until it is resumed. + + Example of a WLAN wireless driver connected to the rfkill subsystem: -------------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -390,9 +419,10 @@ rfkill lines are inactive, it must return RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED if its soft rfkill input line is active. Only if none of the rfkill input lines are active, will it return RFKILL_STATE_UNBLOCKED. -If it doesn't implement the get_state() hook, it must make sure that its calls -to rfkill_force_state() are enough to keep the status always up-to-date, and it -must do a rfkill_force_state() on resume from sleep. +Since the device has a hardware rfkill line, it IS subject to state changes +external to rfkill. Therefore, the driver must make sure that it calls +rfkill_force_state() to keep the status always up-to-date, and it must do a +rfkill_force_state() on resume from sleep. Every time the driver gets a notification from the card that one of its rfkill lines changed state (polling might be needed on badly designed cards that don't @@ -422,13 +452,24 @@ of the hardware is unknown), or read-write (where the hardware can be queried about its current state). The rfkill class will call the get_state hook of a device every time it needs -to know the *real* current state of the hardware. This can happen often. +to know the *real* current state of the hardware. This can happen often, but +it does not do any polling, so it is not enough on hardware that is subject +to state changes outside of the rfkill subsystem. + +Therefore, calling rfkill_force_state() when a state change happens is +mandatory when the device has a hardware rfkill line, or when something else +like the firmware could cause its state to be changed without going through the +rfkill class. Some hardware provides events when its status changes. In these cases, it is best for the driver to not provide a get_state hook, and instead register the rfkill class *already* with the correct status, and keep it updated using rfkill_force_state() when it gets an event from the hardware. +rfkill_force_state() must be used on the device resume handlers to update the +rfkill status, should there be any chance of the device status changing during +the sleep. + There is no provision for a statically-allocated rfkill struct. You must use rfkill_allocate() to allocate one. diff --git a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO index bf0baa19ec24..339207d11d95 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO +++ b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO @@ -70,13 +70,19 @@ Command line parameters Note: While already known devices can be added to the list of devices to be ignored, there will be no effect on then. However, if such a device - disappears and then reappears, it will then be ignored. + disappears and then reappears, it will then be ignored. To make + known devices go away, you need the "purge" command (see below). For example, "echo add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc, 0.0.af00-0.0.afff > /proc/cio_ignore" will add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc and 0.0.af00-0.0.afff to the list of ignored devices. + You can remove already known but now ignored devices via + "echo purge > /proc/cio_ignore" + All devices ignored but still registered and not online (= not in use) + will be deregistered and thus removed from the system. + The devices can be specified either by bus id (0.x.abcd) or, for 2.4 backward compatibility, by the device number in hexadecimal (0xabcd or abcd). Device numbers given as 0xabcd will be interpreted as 0.0.abcd. @@ -98,8 +104,7 @@ debugfs entries handling). - /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_msg/sprintf - Various debug messages from the common I/O-layer, including messages - printed when cio_msg=yes. + Various debug messages from the common I/O-layer. - /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_trace/hex_ascii Logs the calling of functions in the common I/O-layer and, if applicable, diff --git a/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt b/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt index e938c442277d..bde473df748d 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt +++ b/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ device 4711 via subchannel 1 in subchannel set 0, and subchannel 2 is a non-I/O subchannel. Device 1234 is accessed via subchannel 0 in subchannel set 1. The subchannel named 'defunct' does not represent any real subchannel on the -system; it is a pseudo subchannel where disconnnected ccw devices are moved to +system; it is a pseudo subchannel where disconnected ccw devices are moved to if they are displaced by another ccw device becoming operational on their former subchannel. The ccw devices will be moved again to a proper subchannel if they become operational again on that subchannel. diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt index 88bcb8767335..9d8eb553884c 100644 --- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt @@ -1,151 +1,242 @@ + ============= + CFS Scheduler + ============= -This is the CFS scheduler. - -80% of CFS's design can be summed up in a single sentence: CFS basically -models an "ideal, precise multi-tasking CPU" on real hardware. - -"Ideal multi-tasking CPU" is a (non-existent :-)) CPU that has 100% -physical power and which can run each task at precise equal speed, in -parallel, each at 1/nr_running speed. For example: if there are 2 tasks -running then it runs each at 50% physical power - totally in parallel. - -On real hardware, we can run only a single task at once, so while that -one task runs, the other tasks that are waiting for the CPU are at a -disadvantage - the current task gets an unfair amount of CPU time. In -CFS this fairness imbalance is expressed and tracked via the per-task -p->wait_runtime (nanosec-unit) value. "wait_runtime" is the amount of -time the task should now run on the CPU for it to become completely fair -and balanced. - -( small detail: on 'ideal' hardware, the p->wait_runtime value would - always be zero - no task would ever get 'out of balance' from the - 'ideal' share of CPU time. ) - -CFS's task picking logic is based on this p->wait_runtime value and it -is thus very simple: it always tries to run the task with the largest -p->wait_runtime value. In other words, CFS tries to run the task with -the 'gravest need' for more CPU time. So CFS always tries to split up -CPU time between runnable tasks as close to 'ideal multitasking -hardware' as possible. - -Most of the rest of CFS's design just falls out of this really simple -concept, with a few add-on embellishments like nice levels, -multiprocessing and various algorithm variants to recognize sleepers. - -In practice it works like this: the system runs a task a bit, and when -the task schedules (or a scheduler tick happens) the task's CPU usage is -'accounted for': the (small) time it just spent using the physical CPU -is deducted from p->wait_runtime. [minus the 'fair share' it would have -gotten anyway]. Once p->wait_runtime gets low enough so that another -task becomes the 'leftmost task' of the time-ordered rbtree it maintains -(plus a small amount of 'granularity' distance relative to the leftmost -task so that we do not over-schedule tasks and trash the cache) then the -new leftmost task is picked and the current task is preempted. - -The rq->fair_clock value tracks the 'CPU time a runnable task would have -fairly gotten, had it been runnable during that time'. So by using -rq->fair_clock values we can accurately timestamp and measure the -'expected CPU time' a task should have gotten. All runnable tasks are -sorted in the rbtree by the "rq->fair_clock - p->wait_runtime" key, and -CFS picks the 'leftmost' task and sticks to it. As the system progresses -forwards, newly woken tasks are put into the tree more and more to the -right - slowly but surely giving a chance for every task to become the -'leftmost task' and thus get on the CPU within a deterministic amount of -time. - -Some implementation details: - - - the introduction of Scheduling Classes: an extensible hierarchy of - scheduler modules. These modules encapsulate scheduling policy - details and are handled by the scheduler core without the core - code assuming about them too much. - - - sched_fair.c implements the 'CFS desktop scheduler': it is a - replacement for the vanilla scheduler's SCHED_OTHER interactivity - code. - - I'd like to give credit to Con Kolivas for the general approach here: - he has proven via RSDL/SD that 'fair scheduling' is possible and that - it results in better desktop scheduling. Kudos Con! - - The CFS patch uses a completely different approach and implementation - from RSDL/SD. My goal was to make CFS's interactivity quality exceed - that of RSDL/SD, which is a high standard to meet :-) Testing - feedback is welcome to decide this one way or another. [ and, in any - case, all of SD's logic could be added via a kernel/sched_sd.c module - as well, if Con is interested in such an approach. ] - - CFS's design is quite radical: it does not use runqueues, it uses a - time-ordered rbtree to build a 'timeline' of future task execution, - and thus has no 'array switch' artifacts (by which both the vanilla - scheduler and RSDL/SD are affected). - - CFS uses nanosecond granularity accounting and does not rely on any - jiffies or other HZ detail. Thus the CFS scheduler has no notion of - 'timeslices' and has no heuristics whatsoever. There is only one - central tunable (you have to switch on CONFIG_SCHED_DEBUG): - - /proc/sys/kernel/sched_granularity_ns - - which can be used to tune the scheduler from 'desktop' (low - latencies) to 'server' (good batching) workloads. It defaults to a - setting suitable for desktop workloads. SCHED_BATCH is handled by the - CFS scheduler module too. - - Due to its design, the CFS scheduler is not prone to any of the - 'attacks' that exist today against the heuristics of the stock - scheduler: fiftyp.c, thud.c, chew.c, ring-test.c, massive_intr.c all - work fine and do not impact interactivity and produce the expected - behavior. - - the CFS scheduler has a much stronger handling of nice levels and - SCHED_BATCH: both types of workloads should be isolated much more - agressively than under the vanilla scheduler. - - ( another detail: due to nanosec accounting and timeline sorting, - sched_yield() support is very simple under CFS, and in fact under - CFS sched_yield() behaves much better than under any other - scheduler i have tested so far. ) - - - sched_rt.c implements SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR semantics, in a simpler - way than the vanilla scheduler does. It uses 100 runqueues (for all - 100 RT priority levels, instead of 140 in the vanilla scheduler) - and it needs no expired array. - - - reworked/sanitized SMP load-balancing: the runqueue-walking - assumptions are gone from the load-balancing code now, and - iterators of the scheduling modules are used. The balancing code got - quite a bit simpler as a result. - - -Group scheduler extension to CFS -================================ - -Normally the scheduler operates on individual tasks and strives to provide -fair CPU time to each task. Sometimes, it may be desirable to group tasks -and provide fair CPU time to each such task group. For example, it may -be desirable to first provide fair CPU time to each user on the system -and then to each task belonging to a user. - -CONFIG_FAIR_GROUP_SCHED strives to achieve exactly that. It lets -SCHED_NORMAL/BATCH tasks be be grouped and divides CPU time fairly among such -groups. At present, there are two (mutually exclusive) mechanisms to group -tasks for CPU bandwidth control purpose: - - - Based on user id (CONFIG_FAIR_USER_SCHED) - In this option, tasks are grouped according to their user id. - - Based on "cgroup" pseudo filesystem (CONFIG_FAIR_CGROUP_SCHED) - This options lets the administrator create arbitrary groups - of tasks, using the "cgroup" pseudo filesystem. See - Documentation/cgroups.txt for more information about this - filesystem. -Only one of these options to group tasks can be chosen and not both. +1. OVERVIEW + +CFS stands for "Completely Fair Scheduler," and is the new "desktop" process +scheduler implemented by Ingo Molnar and merged in Linux 2.6.23. It is the +replacement for the previous vanilla scheduler's SCHED_OTHER interactivity +code. + +80% of CFS's design can be summed up in a single sentence: CFS basically models +an "ideal, precise multi-tasking CPU" on real hardware. + +"Ideal multi-tasking CPU" is a (non-existent :-)) CPU that has 100% physical +power and which can run each task at precise equal speed, in parallel, each at +1/nr_running speed. For example: if there are 2 tasks running, then it runs +each at 50% physical power --- i.e., actually in parallel. + +On real hardware, we can run only a single task at once, so we have to +introduce the concept of "virtual runtime." The virtual runtime of a task +specifies when its next timeslice would start execution on the ideal +multi-tasking CPU described above. In practice, the virtual runtime of a task +is its actual runtime normalized to the total number of running tasks. + + + +2. FEW IMPLEMENTATION DETAILS + +In CFS the virtual runtime is expressed and tracked via the per-task +p->se.vruntime (nanosec-unit) value. This way, it's possible to accurately +timestamp and measure the "expected CPU time" a task should have gotten. + +[ small detail: on "ideal" hardware, at any time all tasks would have the same + p->se.vruntime value --- i.e., tasks would execute simultaneously and no task + would ever get "out of balance" from the "ideal" share of CPU time. ] + +CFS's task picking logic is based on this p->se.vruntime value and it is thus +very simple: it always tries to run the task with the smallest p->se.vruntime +value (i.e., the task which executed least so far). CFS always tries to split +up CPU time between runnable tasks as close to "ideal multitasking hardware" as +possible. + +Most of the rest of CFS's design just falls out of this really simple concept, +with a few add-on embellishments like nice levels, multiprocessing and various +algorithm variants to recognize sleepers. + + + +3. THE RBTREE + +CFS's design is quite radical: it does not use the old data structures for the +runqueues, but it uses a time-ordered rbtree to build a "timeline" of future +task execution, and thus has no "array switch" artifacts (by which both the +previous vanilla scheduler and RSDL/SD are affected). + +CFS also maintains the rq->cfs.min_vruntime value, which is a monotonic +increasing value tracking the smallest vruntime among all tasks in the +runqueue. The total amount of work done by the system is tracked using +min_vruntime; that value is used to place newly activated entities on the left +side of the tree as much as possible. + +The total number of running tasks in the runqueue is accounted through the +rq->cfs.load value, which is the sum of the weights of the tasks queued on the +runqueue. + +CFS maintains a time-ordered rbtree, where all runnable tasks are sorted by the +p->se.vruntime key (there is a subtraction using rq->cfs.min_vruntime to +account for possible wraparounds). CFS picks the "leftmost" task from this +tree and sticks to it. +As the system progresses forwards, the executed tasks are put into the tree +more and more to the right --- slowly but surely giving a chance for every task +to become the "leftmost task" and thus get on the CPU within a deterministic +amount of time. + +Summing up, CFS works like this: it runs a task a bit, and when the task +schedules (or a scheduler tick happens) the task's CPU usage is "accounted +for": the (small) time it just spent using the physical CPU is added to +p->se.vruntime. Once p->se.vruntime gets high enough so that another task +becomes the "leftmost task" of the time-ordered rbtree it maintains (plus a +small amount of "granularity" distance relative to the leftmost task so that we +do not over-schedule tasks and trash the cache), then the new leftmost task is +picked and the current task is preempted. + + + +4. SOME FEATURES OF CFS + +CFS uses nanosecond granularity accounting and does not rely on any jiffies or +other HZ detail. Thus the CFS scheduler has no notion of "timeslices" in the +way the previous scheduler had, and has no heuristics whatsoever. There is +only one central tunable (you have to switch on CONFIG_SCHED_DEBUG): + + /proc/sys/kernel/sched_granularity_ns + +which can be used to tune the scheduler from "desktop" (i.e., low latencies) to +"server" (i.e., good batching) workloads. It defaults to a setting suitable +for desktop workloads. SCHED_BATCH is handled by the CFS scheduler module too. + +Due to its design, the CFS scheduler is not prone to any of the "attacks" that +exist today against the heuristics of the stock scheduler: fiftyp.c, thud.c, +chew.c, ring-test.c, massive_intr.c all work fine and do not impact +interactivity and produce the expected behavior. + +The CFS scheduler has a much stronger handling of nice levels and SCHED_BATCH +than the previous vanilla scheduler: both types of workloads are isolated much +more aggressively. + +SMP load-balancing has been reworked/sanitized: the runqueue-walking +assumptions are gone from the load-balancing code now, and iterators of the +scheduling modules are used. The balancing code got quite a bit simpler as a +result. + + + +5. Scheduling policies + +CFS implements three scheduling policies: + + - SCHED_NORMAL (traditionally called SCHED_OTHER): The scheduling + policy that is used for regular tasks. + + - SCHED_BATCH: Does not preempt nearly as often as regular tasks + would, thereby allowing tasks to run longer and make better use of + caches but at the cost of interactivity. This is well suited for + batch jobs. + + - SCHED_IDLE: This is even weaker than nice 19, but its not a true + idle timer scheduler in order to avoid to get into priority + inversion problems which would deadlock the machine. + +SCHED_FIFO/_RR are implemented in sched_rt.c and are as specified by +POSIX. + +The command chrt from util-linux-ng 2.13.1.1 can set all of these except +SCHED_IDLE. -Group scheduler tunables: -When CONFIG_FAIR_USER_SCHED is defined, a directory is created in sysfs for -each new user and a "cpu_share" file is added in that directory. + +6. SCHEDULING CLASSES + +The new CFS scheduler has been designed in such a way to introduce "Scheduling +Classes," an extensible hierarchy of scheduler modules. These modules +encapsulate scheduling policy details and are handled by the scheduler core +without the core code assuming too much about them. + +sched_fair.c implements the CFS scheduler described above. + +sched_rt.c implements SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR semantics, in a simpler way than +the previous vanilla scheduler did. It uses 100 runqueues (for all 100 RT +priority levels, instead of 140 in the previous scheduler) and it needs no +expired array. + +Scheduling classes are implemented through the sched_class structure, which +contains hooks to functions that must be called whenever an interesting event +occurs. + +This is the (partial) list of the hooks: + + - enqueue_task(...) + + Called when a task enters a runnable state. + It puts the scheduling entity (task) into the red-black tree and + increments the nr_running variable. + + - dequeue_tree(...) + + When a task is no longer runnable, this function is called to keep the + corresponding scheduling entity out of the red-black tree. It decrements + the nr_running variable. + + - yield_task(...) + + This function is basically just a dequeue followed by an enqueue, unless the + compat_yield sysctl is turned on; in that case, it places the scheduling + entity at the right-most end of the red-black tree. + + - check_preempt_curr(...) + + This function checks if a task that entered the runnable state should + preempt the currently running task. + + - pick_next_task(...) + + This function chooses the most appropriate task eligible to run next. + + - set_curr_task(...) + + This function is called when a task changes its scheduling class or changes + its task group. + + - task_tick(...) + + This function is mostly called from time tick functions; it might lead to + process switch. This drives the running preemption. + + - task_new(...) + + The core scheduler gives the scheduling module an opportunity to manage new + task startup. The CFS scheduling module uses it for group scheduling, while + the scheduling module for a real-time task does not use it. + + + +7. GROUP SCHEDULER EXTENSIONS TO CFS + +Normally, the scheduler operates on individual tasks and strives to provide +fair CPU time to each task. Sometimes, it may be desirable to group tasks and +provide fair CPU time to each such task group. For example, it may be +desirable to first provide fair CPU time to each user on the system and then to +each task belonging to a user. + +CONFIG_GROUP_SCHED strives to achieve exactly that. It lets tasks to be +grouped and divides CPU time fairly among such groups. + +CONFIG_RT_GROUP_SCHED permits to group real-time (i.e., SCHED_FIFO and +SCHED_RR) tasks. + +CONFIG_FAIR_GROUP_SCHED permits to group CFS (i.e., SCHED_NORMAL and +SCHED_BATCH) tasks. + +At present, there are two (mutually exclusive) mechanisms to group tasks for +CPU bandwidth control purposes: + + - Based on user id (CONFIG_USER_SCHED) + + With this option, tasks are grouped according to their user id. + + - Based on "cgroup" pseudo filesystem (CONFIG_CGROUP_SCHED) + + This options needs CONFIG_CGROUPS to be defined, and lets the administrator + create arbitrary groups of tasks, using the "cgroup" pseudo filesystem. See + Documentation/cgroups.txt for more information about this filesystem. + +Only one of these options to group tasks can be chosen and not both. + +When CONFIG_USER_SCHED is defined, a directory is created in sysfs for each new +user and a "cpu_share" file is added in that directory. # cd /sys/kernel/uids # cat 512/cpu_share # Display user 512's CPU share @@ -155,16 +246,14 @@ each new user and a "cpu_share" file is added in that directory. 2048 # -CPU bandwidth between two users are divided in the ratio of their CPU shares. -For ex: if you would like user "root" to get twice the bandwidth of user -"guest", then set the cpu_share for both the users such that "root"'s -cpu_share is twice "guest"'s cpu_share - +CPU bandwidth between two users is divided in the ratio of their CPU shares. +For example: if you would like user "root" to get twice the bandwidth of user +"guest," then set the cpu_share for both the users such that "root"'s cpu_share +is twice "guest"'s cpu_share. -When CONFIG_FAIR_CGROUP_SCHED is defined, a "cpu.shares" file is created -for each group created using the pseudo filesystem. See example steps -below to create task groups and modify their CPU share using the "cgroups" -pseudo filesystem +When CONFIG_CGROUP_SCHED is defined, a "cpu.shares" file is created for each +group created using the pseudo filesystem. See example steps below to create +task groups and modify their CPU share using the "cgroups" pseudo filesystem. # mkdir /dev/cpuctl # mount -t cgroup -ocpu none /dev/cpuctl diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas index 716fcc1cafb5..c851ef497795 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas @@ -1,3 +1,26 @@ + +1 Release Date : Thur.July. 24 11:41:51 PST 2008 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Sumant Patro + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.04.01 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.22 + +1. Add the new controller (0078, 0079) support to the driver + Those controllers are LSI's next generatation(gen2) SAS controllers. + +1 Release Date : Mon.June. 23 10:12:45 PST 2008 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Sumant Patro + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.22 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.20 + +1. Add shutdown DCMD cmd to the shutdown routine to make FW shutdown proper. +2. Unexpected interrupt occurs in HWR Linux driver, add the dumy readl pci flush will fix this issue. + 1 Release Date : Mon. March 10 11:02:31 PDT 2008 - (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) Sumant Patro diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt b/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt index a810421f1fb3..3920f28710c4 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ - Michael Lang June 25 1997: (v1.8b) - 1) Some cosmetical changes for the handling of SCSI-device-types. + 1) Some cosmetic changes for the handling of SCSI-device-types. Now, also CD-Burners / WORMs and SCSI-scanners should work. For MO-drives I have no experience, therefore not yet supported. In logical_devices I changed from different type-variables to one @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ in version 4.0. This was never really necessary, as all troubles were based on non-command related reasons up to now, so bypassing commands did not help to avoid any bugs. It is kept in 3.2X for debugging reasons. - 5) Dynamical reassignment of ldns was again verified and analyzed to be + 5) Dynamic reassignment of ldns was again verified and analyzed to be completely inoperational. This is corrected and should work now. 6) All commands that get sent to the SCSI adapter were verified and completed in such a way, that they are now completely conform to the @@ -1386,7 +1386,7 @@ concerning the Linux-kernel in special, this SCSI-driver comes without any warranty. Its functionality is tested as good as possible on certain machines and combinations of computer hardware, which does not exclude, - that dataloss or severe damage of hardware is possible while using this + that data loss or severe damage of hardware is possible while using this part of software on some arbitrary computer hardware or in combination with other software packages. It is highly recommended to make backup copies of your data before using this software. Furthermore, personal diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt b/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt index 4dbe41370a6d..5741ea8aa88a 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ Cable pull and temporary device Loss: being removed, a switch rebooting, or a device reboot), the driver could hide the disappearance of the device from the midlayer. I/O's issued to the LLDD would simply be queued for a short duration, allowing the device - to reappear or link come back alive, with no inadvertant side effects + to reappear or link come back alive, with no inadvertent side effects to the system. If the driver did not hide these conditions, i/o would be errored by the driver, the mid-layer would exhaust its retries, and the device would be taken offline. Manual intervention would be required to diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt index d403e46d8463..38d324d62b25 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Overview: discussion will concentrate on NPIV. Note: World Wide Name assignment (and uniqueness guarantees) are left - up to an administrative entity controling the vport. For example, + up to an administrative entity controlling the vport. For example, if vports are to be associated with virtual machines, a XEN mgmt utility would be responsible for creating wwpn/wwnn's for the vport, using it's own naming authority and OUI. (Note: it already does this @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Device Trees and Vport Objects: Here's what to expect in the device tree : The typical Physical Port's Scsi_Host: /sys/devices/.../host17/ - and it has the typical decendent tree: + and it has the typical descendant tree: /sys/devices/.../host17/rport-17:0-0/target17:0:0/17:0:0:0: and then the vport is created on the Physical Port: /sys/devices/.../host17/vport-17:0-0 @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Vport States: independent of the adapter's link state. - Instantiation of the vport on the FC link via ELS traffic, etc. This is equivalent to a "link up" and successfull link initialization. - Futher information can be found in the interfaces section below for + Further information can be found in the interfaces section below for Vport Creation. Once a vport has been instantiated with the kernel/LLDD, a vport state @@ -436,6 +436,42 @@ Other: was updated to remove all vports for the fc_host as well. +Transport supplied functions +---------------------------- + +The following functions are supplied by the FC-transport for use by LLDs. + + fc_vport_create - create a vport + fc_vport_terminate - detach and remove a vport + +Details: + +/** + * fc_vport_create - Admin App or LLDD requests creation of a vport + * @shost: scsi host the virtual port is connected to. + * @ids: The world wide names, FC4 port roles, etc for + * the virtual port. + * + * Notes: + * This routine assumes no locks are held on entry. + */ +struct fc_vport * +fc_vport_create(struct Scsi_Host *shost, struct fc_vport_identifiers *ids) + +/** + * fc_vport_terminate - Admin App or LLDD requests termination of a vport + * @vport: fc_vport to be terminated + * + * Calls the LLDD vport_delete() function, then deallocates and removes + * the vport from the shost and object tree. + * + * Notes: + * This routine assumes no locks are held on entry. + */ +int +fc_vport_terminate(struct fc_vport *vport) + + Credits ======= The following people have contributed to this document: diff --git a/Documentation/sh/clk.txt b/Documentation/sh/clk.txt index 9aef710e9a4b..114b595cfa97 100644 --- a/Documentation/sh/clk.txt +++ b/Documentation/sh/clk.txt @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ means no changes to adjanced clock Internally, the clk_set_rate_ex forwards request to clk->ops->set_rate method, if it is present in ops structure. The method should set the clock rate and adjust all needed clocks according to the passed algo_id. -Exact values for algo_id are machine-dependend. For the sh7722, the following +Exact values for algo_id are machine-dependent. For the sh7722, the following values are defined: NO_CHANGE = 0, diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 72aff61e7315..e0e54a27fc10 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -746,8 +746,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. Module snd-hda-intel -------------------- - Module for Intel HD Audio (ICH6, ICH6M, ESB2, ICH7, ICH8), - ATI SB450, SB600, RS600, + Module for Intel HD Audio (ICH6, ICH6M, ESB2, ICH7, ICH8, ICH9, ICH10, + PCH, SCH), + ATI SB450, SB600, R600, RS600, RS690, RS780, RV610, RV620, + RV630, RV635, RV670, RV770, VIA VT8251/VT8237A, SIS966, ULI M5461 @@ -807,6 +809,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. ALC260 hp HP machines hp-3013 HP machines (3013-variant) + hp-dc7600 HP DC7600 fujitsu Fujitsu S7020 acer Acer TravelMate will Will laptops (PB V7900) @@ -828,8 +831,11 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. hippo Hippo (ATI) with jack detection, Sony UX-90s hippo_1 Hippo (Benq) with jack detection sony-assamd Sony ASSAMD + toshiba-s06 Toshiba S06 + toshiba-rx1 Toshiba RX1 ultra Samsung Q1 Ultra Vista model lenovo-3000 Lenovo 3000 y410 + nec NEC Versa S9100 basic fixed pin assignment w/o SPDIF auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) @@ -838,6 +844,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. 3stack 3-stack model toshiba Toshiba A205 acer Acer laptops + acer-aspire Acer Aspire One dell Dell OEM laptops (Vostro 1200) zepto Zepto laptops test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can @@ -847,6 +854,9 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. ALC269 basic Basic preset + quanta Quanta FL1 + eeepc-p703 ASUS Eeepc P703 P900A + eeepc-p901 ASUS Eeepc P901 S101 ALC662/663 3stack-dig 3-stack (2-channel) with SPDIF @@ -856,10 +866,17 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. lenovo-101e Lenovo laptop eeepc-p701 ASUS Eeepc P701 eeepc-ep20 ASUS Eeepc EP20 + ecs ECS/Foxconn mobo m51va ASUS M51VA g71v ASUS G71V h13 ASUS H13 g50v ASUS G50V + asus-mode1 ASUS + asus-mode2 ASUS + asus-mode3 ASUS + asus-mode4 ASUS + asus-mode5 ASUS + asus-mode6 ASUS auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) ALC882/885 @@ -891,12 +908,14 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. lenovo-101e Lenovo 101E lenovo-nb0763 Lenovo NB0763 lenovo-ms7195-dig Lenovo MS7195 + lenovo-sky Lenovo Sky haier-w66 Haier W66 3stack-hp HP machines with 3stack (Lucknow, Samba boards) 6stack-dell Dell machines with 6stack (Inspiron 530) mitac Mitac 8252D clevo-m720 Clevo M720 laptop series fujitsu-pi2515 Fujitsu AMILO Pi2515 + 3stack-6ch-intel Intel DG33* boards auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) ALC861/660 @@ -929,7 +948,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. allout 5-jack in back, 2-jack in front, SPDIF out auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) - AD1882 + AD1882 / AD1882A 3stack 3-stack mode (default) 6stack 6-stack mode @@ -1024,6 +1043,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. intel-mac-v3 Intel Mac Type 3 intel-mac-v4 Intel Mac Type 4 intel-mac-v5 Intel Mac Type 5 + intel-mac-auto Intel Mac (detect type according to subsystem id) macmini Intel Mac Mini (equivalent with type 3) macbook Intel Mac Book (eq. type 5) macbook-pro-v1 Intel Mac Book Pro 1st generation (eq. type 3) @@ -1078,7 +1098,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. register value without FIFO size correction as the current DMA pointer. position_fix=2 will make the driver to use the position buffer instead of reading SD_LPIB register. - (Usually SD_LPLIB register is more accurate than the + (Usually SD_LPIB register is more accurate than the position buffer.) NB: If you get many "azx_get_response timeout" messages at @@ -1143,8 +1163,6 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards. - Power management is _not_ supported. - Module snd-ice1712 ------------------ @@ -1167,6 +1185,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. * Event Electronics, EZ8 * Digigram VX442 * Lionstracs, Mediastaton + * Terrasoniq TS 88 model - Use the given board model, one of the following: delta1010, dio2496, delta66, delta44, audiophile, delta410, @@ -1201,7 +1220,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. * TerraTec Phase 22 * TerraTec Phase 28 * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 - * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1LT + * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 LT + * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 XT + * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 HIFI + * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 HD2 * AudioTrak Prodigy 192 * Pontis MS300 * Albatron K8X800 Pro II @@ -1212,12 +1234,16 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. * Shuttle SN25P * Onkyo SE-90PCI * Onkyo SE-200PCI + * ESI Juli@ + * Hercules Fortissimo IV + * EGO-SYS WaveTerminal 192M model - Use the given board model, one of the following: revo51, revo71, amp2000, prodigy71, prodigy71lt, - prodigy192, aureon51, aureon71, universe, ap192, - k8x800, phase22, phase28, ms300, av710, se200pci, - se90pci + prodigy71xt, prodigy71hifi, prodigyhd2, prodigy192, + juli, aureon51, aureon71, universe, ap192, k8x800, + phase22, phase28, ms300, av710, se200pci, se90pci, + fortissimo4, sn25p, WT192M This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe. @@ -1256,7 +1282,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. Module for AC'97 motherboards from Intel and compatibles. * Intel i810/810E, i815, i820, i830, i84x, MX440 - ICH5, ICH6, ICH7, ESB2 + ICH5, ICH6, ICH7, 6300ESB, ESB2 * SiS 7012 (SiS 735) * NVidia NForce, NForce2, NForce3, MCP04, CK804 CK8, CK8S, MCP501 @@ -1627,8 +1653,6 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards. - Power management is _not_ supported. - Module snd-pcsp ----------------- @@ -1954,6 +1978,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. * CHIC True Sound 4Dwave * Shark Predator4D-PCI * Jaton SonicWave 4D + * SiS SI7018 PCI Audio + * Hoontech SoundTrack Digital 4DWave NX pcm_channels - max channels (voices) reserved for PCM wavetable_size - max wavetable size in kB (4-?kb) @@ -1969,12 +1995,25 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. vid - Vendor ID for the device (optional) pid - Product ID for the device (optional) + nrpacks - Max. number of packets per URB (default: 8) + async_unlink - Use async unlink mode (default: yes) device_setup - Device specific magic number (optional) - Influence depends on the device - Default: 0x0000 + ignore_ctl_error - Ignore any USB-controller regarding mixer + interface (default: no) This module supports multiple devices, autoprobe and hotplugging. + NB: nrpacks parameter can be modified dynamically via sysfs. + Don't put the value over 20. Changing via sysfs has no sanity + check. + NB: async_unlink=0 would cause Oops. It remains just for + debugging purpose (if any). + NB: ignore_ctl_error=1 may help when you get an error at accessing + the mixer element such as URB error -22. This happens on some + buggy USB device or the controller. + Module snd-usb-caiaq -------------------- @@ -2080,13 +2119,11 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. Module snd-virtuoso ------------------- - Module for sound cards based on the Asus AV200 chip, i.e., - Xonar D2 and Xonar D2X. + Module for sound cards based on the Asus AV100/AV200 chips, + i.e., Xonar D1, DX, D2, D2X and HDAV1.3 (Deluxe). This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards. - Power management is _not_ supported. - Module snd-vx222 ---------------- diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt index 2ad5e6306c44..a4c53d8961e1 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt @@ -236,15 +236,15 @@ The parameter can be given: alias snd-card-1 snd-usb-audio options snd-usb-audio index=1 device_setup=0x09 -CAUTION when initializaing the device +CAUTION when initializing the device ------------------------------------- * Correct initialization on the device requires that device_setup is given to the module BEFORE the device is turned on. So, if you use the "manual probing" method described above, take care to power-on the device AFTER this initialization. - * Failing to respect this will lead in a misconfiguration of the device. In this case - turn off the device, unproble the snd-usb-audio module, then probe it again with + * Failing to respect this will lead to a misconfiguration of the device. In this case + turn off the device, unprobe the snd-usb-audio module, then probe it again with correct device_setup parameter and then (and only then) turn on the device again. * If you've correctly initialized the device in a valid mode and then want to switch @@ -388,9 +388,9 @@ There are 2 main potential issues when using Jackd with the device: Jack supports big endian devices only in recent versions (thanks to Andreas Steinmetz for his first big-endian patch). I can't remember -extacly when this support was released into jackd, let's just say that +exactly when this support was released into jackd, let's just say that with jackd version 0.103.0 it's almost ok (just a small bug is affecting -16bits Big-Endian devices, but since you've read carefully the above +16bits Big-Endian devices, but since you've read carefully the above paragraphs, you're now using kernel >= 2.6.23 and your 16bits devices are now Little Endians ;-) ). diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl index e13c4e67029f..87a7c07ab658 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl @@ -5073,8 +5073,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { with <constant>SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_CONTINUOUS</constant> type and the <function>snd_dma_continuous_data(GFP_KERNEL)</function> device pointer, where <constant>GFP_KERNEL</constant> is the kernel allocation flag to - use. For the SBUS, <constant>SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_SBUS</constant> and - <function>snd_dma_sbus_data(sbus_dev)</function> are used instead. + use. For the PCI scatter-gather buffers, use <constant>SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_DEV_SG</constant> with <function>snd_dma_pci_data(pci)</function> @@ -6135,44 +6134,58 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { </para> </section> - <section id="useful-functions-snd-assert"> - <title><function>snd_assert()</function></title> + <section id="useful-functions-snd-bug"> + <title><function>snd_BUG()</function></title> <para> - <function>snd_assert()</function> macro is similar with the - normal <function>assert()</function> macro. For example, + It shows the <computeroutput>BUG?</computeroutput> message and + stack trace as well as <function>snd_BUG_ON</function> at the point. + It's useful to show that a fatal error happens there. + </para> + <para> + When no debug flag is set, this macro is ignored. + </para> + </section> + + <section id="useful-functions-snd-bug-on"> + <title><function>snd_BUG_ON()</function></title> + <para> + <function>snd_BUG_ON()</function> macro is similar with + <function>WARN_ON()</function> macro. For example, <informalexample> <programlisting> <![CDATA[ - snd_assert(pointer != NULL, return -EINVAL); + snd_BUG_ON(!pointer); ]]> </programlisting> </informalexample> - </para> - <para> - The first argument is the expression to evaluate, and the - second argument is the action if it fails. When - <constant>CONFIG_SND_DEBUG</constant>, is set, it will show an - error message such as <computeroutput>BUG? (xxx)</computeroutput> - together with stack trace. - </para> - <para> - When no debug flag is set, this macro is ignored. - </para> - </section> + or it can be used as the condition, + <informalexample> + <programlisting> +<![CDATA[ + if (snd_BUG_ON(non_zero_is_bug)) + return -EINVAL; +]]> + </programlisting> + </informalexample> - <section id="useful-functions-snd-bug"> - <title><function>snd_BUG()</function></title> - <para> - It shows the <computeroutput>BUG?</computeroutput> message and - stack trace as well as <function>snd_assert</function> at the point. - It's useful to show that a fatal error happens there. </para> + <para> - When no debug flag is set, this macro is ignored. + The macro takes an conditional expression to evaluate. + When <constant>CONFIG_SND_DEBUG</constant>, is set, the + expression is actually evaluated. If it's non-zero, it shows + the warning message such as + <computeroutput>BUG? (xxx)</computeroutput> + normally followed by stack trace. It returns the evaluated + value. + When no <constant>CONFIG_SND_DEBUG</constant> is set, this + macro always returns zero. </para> + </section> + </chapter> diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt index 8e1b02526698..34e87ec1379c 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ CONFIG_SND_HDA_POWER_SAVE kconfig. It's called when the codec needs to power up or may power down. The controller should check the all belonging codecs on the bus whether they are actually powered off (check codec->power_on), and optionally the driver may power down the -contoller side, too. +controller side, too. The bus instance is created via snd_hda_bus_new(). You need to pass the card instance, the template, and the pointer to store the diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt index c784a18b94dc..46f9684d0b29 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Audio DAPM widgets fall into a number of types:- (Widgets are defined in include/sound/soc-dapm.h) Widgets are usually added in the codec driver and the machine driver. There are -convience macros defined in soc-dapm.h that can be used to quickly build a +convenience macros defined in soc-dapm.h that can be used to quickly build a list of widgets of the codecs and machines DAPM widgets. Most widgets have a name, register, shift and invert. Some widgets have extra @@ -135,11 +135,7 @@ when the Mic is inserted:- static int spitz_mic_bias(struct snd_soc_dapm_widget* w, int event) { - if(SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event)) - set_scoop_gpio(&spitzscoop2_device.dev, SPITZ_SCP2_MIC_BIAS); - else - reset_scoop_gpio(&spitzscoop2_device.dev, SPITZ_SCP2_MIC_BIAS); - + gpio_set_value(SPITZ_GPIO_MIC_BIAS, SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event)); return 0; } @@ -269,11 +265,7 @@ powered only when the spk is in use. /* turn speaker amplifier on/off depending on use */ static int corgi_amp_event(struct snd_soc_dapm_widget *w, int event) { - if (SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event)) - set_scoop_gpio(&corgiscoop_device.dev, CORGI_SCP_APM_ON); - else - reset_scoop_gpio(&corgiscoop_device.dev, CORGI_SCP_APM_ON); - + gpio_set_value(CORGI_GPIO_APM_ON, SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event)); return 0; } diff --git a/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt b/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt deleted file mode 100644 index eb1e28ad8822..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,309 +0,0 @@ - - Writing SBUS Drivers - - David S. Miller (davem@redhat.com) - - The SBUS driver interfaces of the Linux kernel have been -revamped completely for 2.4.x for several reasons. Foremost were -performance and complexity concerns. This document details these -new interfaces and how they are used to write an SBUS device driver. - - SBUS drivers need to include <asm/sbus.h> to get access -to functions and structures described here. - - Probing and Detection - - Each SBUS device inside the machine is described by a -structure called "struct sbus_dev". Likewise, each SBUS bus -found in the system is described by a "struct sbus_bus". For -each SBUS bus, the devices underneath are hung in a tree-like -fashion off of the bus structure. - - The SBUS device structure contains enough information -for you to implement your device probing algorithm and obtain -the bits necessary to run your device. The most commonly -used members of this structure, and their typical usage, -will be detailed below. - - Here is a piece of skeleton code for performing a device -probe in an SBUS driver under Linux: - - static int __devinit mydevice_probe_one(struct sbus_dev *sdev) - { - struct mysdevice *mp = kzalloc(sizeof(*mp), GFP_KERNEL); - - if (!mp) - return -ENODEV; - - ... - dev_set_drvdata(&sdev->ofdev.dev, mp); - return 0; - ... - } - - static int __devinit mydevice_probe(struct of_device *dev, - const struct of_device_id *match) - { - struct sbus_dev *sdev = to_sbus_device(&dev->dev); - - return mydevice_probe_one(sdev); - } - - static int __devexit mydevice_remove(struct of_device *dev) - { - struct sbus_dev *sdev = to_sbus_device(&dev->dev); - struct mydevice *mp = dev_get_drvdata(&dev->dev); - - return mydevice_remove_one(sdev, mp); - } - - static struct of_device_id mydevice_match[] = { - { - .name = "mydevice", - }, - {}, - }; - - MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(of, mydevice_match); - - static struct of_platform_driver mydevice_driver = { - .match_table = mydevice_match, - .probe = mydevice_probe, - .remove = __devexit_p(mydevice_remove), - .driver = { - .name = "mydevice", - }, - }; - - static int __init mydevice_init(void) - { - return of_register_driver(&mydevice_driver, &sbus_bus_type); - } - - static void __exit mydevice_exit(void) - { - of_unregister_driver(&mydevice_driver); - } - - module_init(mydevice_init); - module_exit(mydevice_exit); - - The mydevice_match table is a series of entries which -describes what SBUS devices your driver is meant for. In the -simplest case you specify a string for the 'name' field. Every -SBUS device with a 'name' property matching your string will -be passed one-by-one to your .probe method. - - You should store away your device private state structure -pointer in the drvdata area so that you can retrieve it later on -in your .remove method. - - Any memory allocated, registers mapped, IRQs registered, -etc. must be undone by your .remove method so that all resources -of your device are released by the time it returns. - - You should _NOT_ use the for_each_sbus(), for_each_sbusdev(), -and for_all_sbusdev() interfaces. They are deprecated, will be -removed, and no new driver should reference them ever. - - Mapping and Accessing I/O Registers - - Each SBUS device structure contains an array of descriptors -which describe each register set. We abuse struct resource for that. -They each correspond to the "reg" properties provided by the OBP firmware. - - Before you can access your device's registers you must map -them. And later if you wish to shutdown your driver (for module -unload or similar) you must unmap them. You must treat them as -a resource, which you allocate (map) before using and free up -(unmap) when you are done with it. - - The mapping information is stored in an opaque value -typed as an "unsigned long". This is the type of the return value -of the mapping interface, and the arguments to the unmapping -interface. Let's say you want to map the first set of registers. -Perhaps part of your driver software state structure looks like: - - struct mydevice { - unsigned long control_regs; - ... - struct sbus_dev *sdev; - ... - }; - - At initialization time you then use the sbus_ioremap -interface to map in your registers, like so: - - static void init_one_mydevice(struct sbus_dev *sdev) - { - struct mydevice *mp; - ... - - mp->control_regs = sbus_ioremap(&sdev->resource[0], 0, - CONTROL_REGS_SIZE, "mydevice regs"); - if (!mp->control_regs) { - /* Failure, cleanup and return. */ - } - } - - Second argument to sbus_ioremap is an offset for -cranky devices with broken OBP PROM. The sbus_ioremap uses only -a start address and flags from the resource structure. -Therefore it is possible to use the same resource to map -several sets of registers or even to fabricate a resource -structure if driver gets physical address from some private place. -This practice is discouraged though. Use whatever OBP PROM -provided to you. - - And here is how you might unmap these registers later at -driver shutdown or module unload time, using the sbus_iounmap -interface: - - static void mydevice_unmap_regs(struct mydevice *mp) - { - sbus_iounmap(mp->control_regs, CONTROL_REGS_SIZE); - } - - Finally, to actually access your registers there are 6 -interface routines at your disposal. Accesses are byte (8 bit), -word (16 bit), or longword (32 bit) sized. Here they are: - - u8 sbus_readb(unsigned long reg) /* read byte */ - u16 sbus_readw(unsigned long reg) /* read word */ - u32 sbus_readl(unsigned long reg) /* read longword */ - void sbus_writeb(u8 value, unsigned long reg) /* write byte */ - void sbus_writew(u16 value, unsigned long reg) /* write word */ - void sbus_writel(u32 value, unsigned long reg) /* write longword */ - - So, let's say your device has a control register of some sort -at offset zero. The following might implement resetting your device: - - #define CONTROL 0x00UL - - #define CONTROL_RESET 0x00000001 /* Reset hardware */ - - static void mydevice_reset(struct mydevice *mp) - { - sbus_writel(CONTROL_RESET, mp->regs + CONTROL); - } - - Or perhaps there is a data port register at an offset of -16 bytes which allows you to read bytes from a fifo in the device: - - #define DATA 0x10UL - - static u8 mydevice_get_byte(struct mydevice *mp) - { - return sbus_readb(mp->regs + DATA); - } - - It's pretty straightforward, and clueful readers may have -noticed that these interfaces mimick the PCI interfaces of the -Linux kernel. This was not by accident. - - WARNING: - - DO NOT try to treat these opaque register mapping - values as a memory mapped pointer to some structure - which you can dereference. - - It may be memory mapped, it may not be. In fact it - could be a physical address, or it could be the time - of day xor'd with 0xdeadbeef. :-) - - Whatever it is, it's an implementation detail. The - interface was done this way to shield the driver - author from such complexities. - - Doing DVMA - - SBUS devices can perform DMA transactions in a way similar -to PCI but dissimilar to ISA, e.g. DMA masters supply address. -In contrast to PCI, however, that address (a bus address) is -translated by IOMMU before a memory access is performed and therefore -it is virtual. Sun calls this procedure DVMA. - - Linux supports two styles of using SBUS DVMA: "consistent memory" -and "streaming DVMA". CPU view of consistent memory chunk is, well, -consistent with a view of a device. Think of it as an uncached memory. -Typically this way of doing DVMA is not very fast and drivers use it -mostly for control blocks or queues. On some CPUs we cannot flush or -invalidate individual pages or cache lines and doing explicit flushing -over ever little byte in every control block would be wasteful. - -Streaming DVMA is a preferred way to transfer large amounts of data. -This process works in the following way: -1. a CPU stops accessing a certain part of memory, - flushes its caches covering that memory; -2. a device does DVMA accesses, then posts an interrupt; -3. CPU invalidates its caches and starts to access the memory. - -A single streaming DVMA operation can touch several discontiguous -regions of a virtual bus address space. This is called a scatter-gather -DVMA. - -[TBD: Why do not we neither Solaris attempt to map disjoint pages -into a single virtual chunk with the help of IOMMU, so that non SG -DVMA masters would do SG? It'd be very helpful for RAID.] - - In order to perform a consistent DVMA a driver does something -like the following: - - char *mem; /* Address in the CPU space */ - u32 busa; /* Address in the SBus space */ - - mem = (char *) sbus_alloc_consistent(sdev, MYMEMSIZE, &busa); - - Then mem is used when CPU accesses this memory and u32 -is fed to the device so that it can do DVMA. This is typically -done with an sbus_writel() into some device register. - - Do not forget to free the DVMA resources once you are done: - - sbus_free_consistent(sdev, MYMEMSIZE, mem, busa); - - Streaming DVMA is more interesting. First you allocate some -memory suitable for it or pin down some user pages. Then it all works -like this: - - char *mem = argumen1; - unsigned int size = argument2; - u32 busa; /* Address in the SBus space */ - - *mem = 1; /* CPU can access */ - busa = sbus_map_single(sdev, mem, size); - if (busa == 0) ....... - - /* Tell the device to use busa here */ - /* CPU cannot access the memory without sbus_dma_sync_single() */ - - sbus_unmap_single(sdev, busa, size); - if (*mem == 0) .... /* CPU can access again */ - - It is possible to retain mappings and ask the device to -access data again and again without calling sbus_unmap_single. -However, CPU caches must be invalidated with sbus_dma_sync_single -before such access. - -[TBD but what about writeback caches here... do we have any?] - - There is an equivalent set of functions doing the same thing -only with several memory segments at once for devices capable of -scatter-gather transfers. Use the Source, Luke. - - Examples - - drivers/net/sunhme.c - This is a complicated driver which illustrates many concepts -discussed above and plus it handles both PCI and SBUS boards. - - drivers/scsi/esp.c - Check it out for scatter-gather DVMA. - - drivers/sbus/char/bpp.c - A non-DVMA device. - - drivers/net/sunlance.c - Lance driver abuses consistent mappings for data transfer. -It is a nifty trick which we do not particularly recommend... -Just check it out and know that it's legal. diff --git a/Documentation/sparse.txt b/Documentation/sparse.txt index 1a3bdc27d95e..42f43fa59f24 100644 --- a/Documentation/sparse.txt +++ b/Documentation/sparse.txt @@ -73,10 +73,10 @@ recompiled, or use "make C=2" to run sparse on the files whether they need to be recompiled or not. The latter is a fast way to check the whole tree if you have already built it. -The optional make variable CHECKFLAGS can be used to pass arguments to sparse. -The build system passes -Wbitwise to sparse automatically. To perform -endianness checks, you may define __CHECK_ENDIAN__: +The optional make variable CF can be used to pass arguments to sparse. The +build system passes -Wbitwise to sparse automatically. To perform endianness +checks, you may define __CHECK_ENDIAN__: - make C=2 CHECKFLAGS="-D__CHECK_ENDIAN__" + make C=2 CF="-D__CHECK_ENDIAN__" These checks are disabled by default as they generate a host of warnings. diff --git a/Documentation/spi/Makefile b/Documentation/spi/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a5b03c88beae --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/spi/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := spidev_test spidev_fdx + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) + +HOSTCFLAGS_spidev_test.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include +HOSTCFLAGS_spidev_fdx.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include diff --git a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx index f3853cc37bde..bbe8dee681a5 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx +++ b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Declaring PXA2xx Master Controllers ----------------------------------- Typically a SPI master is defined in the arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c as a "platform device". The master configuration is passed to the driver via a table -found in include/asm-arm/arch-pxa/pxa2xx_spi.h: +found in arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h: struct pxa2xx_spi_master { enum pxa_ssp_type ssp_type; @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ using the "spi_board_info" structure found in "linux/spi/spi.h". See Each slave device attached to the PXA must provide slave specific configuration information via the structure "pxa2xx_spi_chip" found in -"include/asm-arm/arch-pxa/pxa2xx_spi.h". The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver +"arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h". The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver will uses the configuration whenever the driver communicates with the slave device. diff --git a/Documentation/spi/spi-summary b/Documentation/spi/spi-summary index 6d5f18143c50..8bae2f018d34 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/spi-summary +++ b/Documentation/spi/spi-summary @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ board should normally be set up and registered. So for example arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c files might have code like: - #include <asm/arch/spi.h> /* for mysoc_spi_data */ + #include <mach/spi.h> /* for mysoc_spi_data */ /* if your mach-* infrastructure doesn't support kernels that can * run on multiple boards, pdata wouldn't benefit from "__init". @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ So for example arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c files might have code like: And SOC-specific utility code might look something like: - #include <asm/arch/spi.h> + #include <mach/spi.h> static struct platform_device spi2 = { ... }; diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index 276a7e637822..e1ff0d920a5c 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -351,9 +351,10 @@ kernel. This value defaults to SHMMAX. softlockup_thresh: -This value can be used to lower the softlockup tolerance -threshold. The default threshold is 10s. If a cpu is locked up -for 10s, the kernel complains. Valid values are 1-60s. +This value can be used to lower the softlockup tolerance threshold. The +default threshold is 60 seconds. If a cpu is locked up for 60 seconds, +the kernel complains. Valid values are 1-60 seconds. Setting this +tunable to zero will disable the softlockup detection altogether. ============================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt index 8a4863c4edd4..d79eeda7a699 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ of kilobytes free. The VM uses this number to compute a pages_min value for each lowmem zone in the system. Each lowmem zone gets a number of reserved free pages based proportionally on its size. -Some minimal ammount of memory is needed to satisfy PF_MEMALLOC +Some minimal amount of memory is needed to satisfy PF_MEMALLOC allocations; if you set this to lower than 1024KB, your system will become subtly broken, and prone to deadlock under high loads. diff --git a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt index a73ecf5b4bdb..21332233cef1 100644 --- a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt +++ b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ increase of flexibility and the avoidance of duplicated code across architectures justifies the slight increase of the binary size. The conversion of an architecture has no functional impact, but allows to -utilize the high resolution and dynamic tick functionalites without any change +utilize the high resolution and dynamic tick functionalities without any change to the clock event device and timer interrupt code. After the conversion the enabling of high resolution timers and dynamic ticks is simply provided by adding the kernel/time/Kconfig file to the architecture specific Kconfig and diff --git a/Documentation/usb/anchors.txt b/Documentation/usb/anchors.txt index 7304bcf5a306..5e6b64c20d25 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/anchors.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/anchors.txt @@ -42,9 +42,21 @@ This function kills all URBs associated with an anchor. The URBs are called in the reverse temporal order they were submitted. This way no data can be reordered. +usb_unlink_anchored_urbs() +-------------------------- + +This function unlinks all URBs associated with an anchor. The URBs +are processed in the reverse temporal order they were submitted. +This is similar to usb_kill_anchored_urbs(), but it will not sleep. +Therefore no guarantee is made that the URBs have been unlinked when +the call returns. They may be unlinked later but will be unlinked in +finite time. + usb_wait_anchor_empty_timeout() ------------------------------- This function waits for all URBs associated with an anchor to finish or a timeout, whichever comes first. Its return value will tell you whether the timeout was reached. + + diff --git a/Documentation/usb/auerswald.txt b/Documentation/usb/auerswald.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 7ee4d8f69116..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/usb/auerswald.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ - Auerswald USB kernel driver - =========================== - -What is it? What can I do with it? -================================== -The auerswald USB kernel driver connects your linux 2.4.x -system to the auerswald usb-enabled devices. - -There are two types of auerswald usb devices: -a) small PBX systems (ISDN) -b) COMfort system telephones (ISDN) - -The driver installation creates the devices -/dev/usb/auer0..15. These devices carry a vendor- -specific protocol. You may run all auerswald java -software on it. The java software needs a native -library "libAuerUsbJNINative.so" installed on -your system. This library is available from -auerswald and shipped as part of the java software. - -You may create the devices with: - mknod -m 666 /dev/usb/auer0 c 180 112 - ... - mknod -m 666 /dev/usb/auer15 c 180 127 - -Future plans -============ -- Connection to ISDN4LINUX (the hisax interface) - -The maintainer of this driver is wolfgang@iksw-muees.de diff --git a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt index 2af400609498..381b22ee7834 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ not) in a system. This feature will allow you to implement a lock-down of USB devices, fully controlled by user space. As of now, when a USB device is connected it is configured and -it's interfaces inmediately made available to the users. With this +its interfaces are immediately made available to the users. With this modification, only if root authorizes the device to be configured will then it be possible to use it. diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt index b2fc4d4a9917..9d31140e3f5b 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt @@ -436,7 +436,12 @@ post_reset; the USB core guarantees that this is true of internal suspend/resume events as well. If a driver wants to block all suspend/resume calls during some -critical section, it can simply acquire udev->pm_mutex. +critical section, it can simply acquire udev->pm_mutex. Note that +calls to resume may be triggered indirectly. Block IO due to memory +allocations can make the vm subsystem resume a device. Thus while +holding this lock you must not allocate memory with GFP_KERNEL or +GFP_NOFS. + Alternatively, if the critical section might call some of the usb_autopm_* routines, the driver can avoid deadlock by doing: diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828 index 86d1c8e7b18f..aa05e5bb22fb 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828 @@ -2,3 +2,5 @@ 1 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q (au0828) [2040:7200,2040:7210,2040:7217,2040:721b,2040:721f,2040:7280,0fd9:0008] 2 -> Hauppauge HVR850 (au0828) [2040:7240] 3 -> DViCO FusionHDTV USB (au0828) [0fe9:d620] + 4 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q rev xxF8 (au0828) [2040:7201,2040:7211,2040:7281] + 5 -> Hauppauge Woodbury (au0828) [2040:8200] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index 10591467ef16..53449cb99b17 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ 0 -> Unknown EM2800 video grabber (em2800) [eb1a:2800] - 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2750,eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883] + 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883] 2 -> Terratec Cinergy 250 USB (em2820/em2840) [0ccd:0036] 3 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2304:0208] 4 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2040:4200,2040:4201] 5 -> MSI VOX USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) 6 -> Terratec Cinergy 200 USB (em2800) - 7 -> Leadtek Winfast USB II (em2800) + 7 -> Leadtek Winfast USB II (em2800) [0413:6023] 8 -> Kworld USB2800 (em2800) 9 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 90/DVC 100 (em2820/em2840) [2304:0207,2304:021a] 10 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 900 (em2880) [2040:6500] @@ -14,7 +14,46 @@ 13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS (em2880) [0ccd:0047] 14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) 15 -> V-Gear PocketTV (em2800) - 16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950 (em2880) [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b,2040:651f] + 16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950 (em2883) [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b,2040:651f] 17 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD Pro Stick (em2880) [2304:0227] 18 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 900 (R2) (em2880) [2040:6502] 19 -> PointNix Intra-Oral Camera (em2860) + 20 -> AMD ATI TV Wonder HD 600 (em2880) [0438:b002] + 21 -> eMPIA Technology, Inc. GrabBeeX+ Video Encoder (em2800) [eb1a:2801] + 22 -> Unknown EM2750/EM2751 webcam grabber (em2750) [eb1a:2750,eb1a:2751] + 23 -> Huaqi DLCW-130 (em2750) + 24 -> D-Link DUB-T210 TV Tuner (em2820/em2840) [2001:f112] + 25 -> Gadmei UTV310 (em2820/em2840) + 26 -> Hercules Smart TV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) + 27 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2 (Philips FM1216ME) (em2820/em2840) + 28 -> Leadtek Winfast USB II Deluxe (em2820/em2840) + 29 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 100 (em2820/em2840) + 30 -> Videology 20K14XUSB USB2.0 (em2820/em2840) + 31 -> Usbgear VD204v9 (em2821) + 32 -> Supercomp USB 2.0 TV (em2821) + 33 -> SIIG AVTuner-PVR/Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2821) + 34 -> Terratec Cinergy A Hybrid XS (em2860) [0ccd:004f] + 35 -> Typhoon DVD Maker (em2860) + 36 -> NetGMBH Cam (em2860) + 37 -> Gadmei UTV330 (em2860) + 38 -> Yakumo MovieMixer (em2861) + 39 -> KWorld PVRTV 300U (em2861) [eb1a:e300] + 40 -> Plextor ConvertX PX-TV100U (em2861) [093b:a005] + 41 -> Kworld 350 U DVB-T (em2870) [eb1a:e350] + 42 -> Kworld 355 U DVB-T (em2870) [eb1a:e355,eb1a:e357] + 43 -> Terratec Cinergy T XS (em2870) [0ccd:0043] + 44 -> Terratec Cinergy T XS (MT2060) (em2870) + 45 -> Pinnacle PCTV DVB-T (em2870) + 46 -> Compro, VideoMate U3 (em2870) [185b:2870] + 47 -> KWorld DVB-T 305U (em2880) [eb1a:e305] + 48 -> KWorld DVB-T 310U (em2880) [eb1a:e310] + 49 -> MSI DigiVox A/D (em2880) [eb1a:e310] + 50 -> MSI DigiVox A/D II (em2880) [eb1a:e320] + 51 -> Terratec Hybrid XS Secam (em2880) [0ccd:004c] + 52 -> DNT DA2 Hybrid (em2881) + 53 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (em2881) + 54 -> Kworld VS-DVB-T 323UR (em2882) [eb1a:e323] + 55 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2882) (em2882) [0ccd:005e] + 56 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (2) (em2882) [2304:0226] + 57 -> Kworld PlusTV HD Hybrid 330 (em2883) [eb1a:a316] + 58 -> Compro VideoMate ForYou/Stereo (em2820/em2840) [185b:2041] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile b/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1ed0e98d057d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := v4lgrab + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 0c4880af57a3..9a3e4d797fa8 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -List of the webcams know by gspca. +List of the webcams known by gspca. The modules are: gspca_main main driver @@ -88,14 +88,14 @@ zc3xx 0471:0325 Philips SPC 200 NC zc3xx 0471:0326 Philips SPC 300 NC sonixj 0471:0327 Philips SPC 600 NC sonixj 0471:0328 Philips SPC 700 NC -zc3xx 0471:032d Philips spc210nc -zc3xx 0471:032e Philips spc315nc -sonixj 0471:0330 Philips SPC 710NC +zc3xx 0471:032d Philips SPC 210 NC +zc3xx 0471:032e Philips SPC 315 NC +sonixj 0471:0330 Philips SPC 710 NC spca501 0497:c001 Smile International sunplus 04a5:3003 Benq DC 1300 sunplus 04a5:3008 Benq DC 1500 -sunplus 04a5:300a Benq DC3410 -spca500 04a5:300c Benq DC1016 +sunplus 04a5:300a Benq DC 3410 +spca500 04a5:300c Benq DC 1016 sunplus 04f1:1001 JVC GC A50 spca561 04fc:0561 Flexcam 100 sunplus 04fc:500c Sunplus CA500C @@ -175,19 +175,22 @@ sunplus 08ca:2060 Aiptek PocketDV5300 tv8532 0923:010f ICM532 cams mars 093a:050f Mars-Semi Pc-Camera pac207 093a:2460 PAC207 Qtec Webcam 100 -pac207 093a:2463 Philips spc200nc pac207 +pac207 093a:2463 Philips SPC 220 NC pac207 093a:2464 Labtec Webcam 1200 pac207 093a:2468 PAC207 pac207 093a:2470 Genius GF112 -pac207 093a:2471 PAC207 Genius VideoCam ge111 -pac207 093a:2472 PAC207 Genius VideoCam ge110 +pac207 093a:2471 Genius VideoCam ge111 +pac207 093a:2472 Genius VideoCam ge110 pac7311 093a:2600 PAC7311 Typhoon -pac7311 093a:2601 PAC7311 Phillips SPC610NC +pac7311 093a:2601 Philips SPC 610 NC pac7311 093a:2603 PAC7312 -pac7311 093a:2608 PAC7311 Trust WB-3300p -pac7311 093a:260e PAC7311 Gigaware VGA PC Camera, Trust WB-3350p, SIGMA cam 2350 -pac7311 093a:260f PAC7311 SnakeCam +pac7311 093a:2608 Trust WB-3300p +pac7311 093a:260e Gigaware VGA PC Camera, Trust WB-3350p, SIGMA cam 2350 +pac7311 093a:260f SnakeCam pac7311 093a:2621 PAC731x +pac7311 093a:2624 PAC7302 +pac7311 093a:2626 Labtec 2200 +pac7311 093a:262a Webcam 300k zc3xx 0ac8:0302 Z-star Vimicro zc0302 vc032x 0ac8:0321 Vimicro generic vc0321 vc032x 0ac8:0323 Vimicro Vc0323 @@ -220,12 +223,14 @@ sonixj 0c45:60c0 Sangha Sn535 sonixj 0c45:60ec SN9C105+MO4000 sonixj 0c45:60fb Surfer NoName sonixj 0c45:60fc LG-LIC300 +sonixj 0c45:6128 Microdia/Sonix SNP325 sonixj 0c45:612a Avant Camera sonixj 0c45:612c Typhoon Rasy Cam 1.3MPix sonixj 0c45:6130 Sonix Pccam sonixj 0c45:6138 Sn9c120 Mo4000 sonixj 0c45:613b Surfer SN-206 sonixj 0c45:613c Sonix Pccam168 +sonixj 0c45:6143 Sonix Pccam168 sunplus 0d64:0303 Sunplus FashionCam DXG etoms 102c:6151 Qcam Sangha CIF etoms 102c:6251 Qcam xxxxxx VGA @@ -233,7 +238,7 @@ zc3xx 10fd:0128 Typhoon Webshot II USB 300k 0x0128 spca561 10fd:7e50 FlyCam Usb 100 zc3xx 10fd:8050 Typhoon Webshot II USB 300k spca501 1776:501c Arowana 300K CMOS Camera -t613 17a1:0128 T613/TAS5130A +t613 17a1:0128 TASCORP JPEG Webcam, NGS Cyclops vc032x 17ef:4802 Lenovo Vc0323+MI1310_SOC pac207 2001:f115 D-Link DSB-C120 spca500 2899:012c Toptro Industrial diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt index b26f5195af51..73de4050d637 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Loading can be done as shown below: [root@localhost home]# modprobe sn9c102 -Note that the module is called "sn9c102" for historic reasons, althought it +Note that the module is called "sn9c102" for historic reasons, although it does not just support the SN9C102. At this point all the devices supported by the driver and connected to the USB diff --git a/Documentation/vm/Makefile b/Documentation/vm/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6f562f778b28 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/vm/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := slabinfo + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt index 8a5b5763f0fe..ea8714fcc3ad 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ memory that is preset in system at this time. System administrators may want to put this command in one of the local rc init files. This will enable the kernel to request huge pages early in the boot process (when the possibility of getting physical contiguous pages is still very high). In either -case, adminstrators will want to verify the number of hugepages actually +case, administrators will want to verify the number of hugepages actually allocated by checking the sysctl or meminfo. /proc/sys/vm/nr_overcommit_hugepages indicates how large the pool of diff --git a/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt b/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt index bad16d3f6a47..6aaaeb38730c 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ most general to most specific: the policy at the time they were allocated. VMA Policy: A "VMA" or "Virtual Memory Area" refers to a range of a task's - virtual adddress space. A task may define a specific policy for a range + virtual address space. A task may define a specific policy for a range of its virtual address space. See the MEMORY POLICIES APIS section, below, for an overview of the mbind() system call used to set a VMA policy. @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ follows: Because of this extra reference counting, and because we must lookup shared policies in a tree structure under spinlock, shared policies are - more expensive to use in the page allocation path. This is expecially + more expensive to use in the page allocation path. This is especially true for shared policies on shared memory regions shared by tasks running on different NUMA nodes. This extra overhead can be avoided by always falling back to task or system default policy for shared memory regions, diff --git a/Documentation/vm/page_migration b/Documentation/vm/page_migration index 99f89aa10169..d5fdfd34bbaf 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/page_migration +++ b/Documentation/vm/page_migration @@ -18,10 +18,11 @@ migrate_pages function call takes two sets of nodes and moves pages of a process that are located on the from nodes to the destination nodes. Page migration functions are provided by the numactl package by Andi Kleen (a version later than 0.9.3 is required. Get it from -ftp://ftp.suse.com/pub/people/ak). numactl provided libnuma which -provides an interface similar to other numa functionality for page migration. -cat /proc/<pid>/numa_maps allows an easy review of where the pages of -a process are located. See also the numa_maps manpage in the numactl package. +ftp://oss.sgi.com/www/projects/libnuma/download/). numactl provides libnuma +which provides an interface similar to other numa functionality for page +migration. cat /proc/<pid>/numa_maps allows an easy review of where the +pages of a process are located. See also the numa_maps documentation in the +proc(5) man page. Manual migration is useful if for example the scheduler has relocated a process to a processor on a distant node. A batch scheduler or an diff --git a/Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt b/Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt index 10c2e411cca8..991c26a6ef64 100644 --- a/Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt +++ b/Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt @@ -114,6 +114,6 @@ CREDITS Original impetus and research by Randy Dunlap Written by Jonathan Corbet -Improvements via coments from Satyam Sharma, Johannes Stezenbach, Jesper +Improvements via comments from Satyam Sharma, Johannes Stezenbach, Jesper Juhl, Heikki Orsila, H. Peter Anvin, Philipp Hahn, and Stefan Richter. diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/src/Makefile b/Documentation/watchdog/src/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..40e5f46e4740 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/src/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := watchdog-simple watchdog-test + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/x86/00-INDEX b/Documentation/x86/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dbe3377754af --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/x86/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +00-INDEX + - this file +mtrr.txt + - how to use x86 Memory Type Range Registers to increase performance diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt index 147bfe511cdd..83c0033ee9e0 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Protocol: 2.00+ Field name: start_sys Type: read -Offset/size: 0x20c/4 +Offset/size: 0x20c/2 Protocol: 2.00+ The load low segment (0x1000). Obsolete. diff --git a/Documentation/mtrr.txt b/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt index c39ac395970e..cc071dc333c2 100644 --- a/Documentation/mtrr.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Richard Gooch The AMD K6-2 (stepping 8 and above) and K6-3 processors have two MTRRs. These are supported. The AMD Athlon family provide 8 Intel style MTRRs. - + The Centaur C6 (WinChip) has 8 MCRs, allowing write-combining. These are supported. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1 reg01: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 16MB: write-combining, count=1 reg02: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 4kB: uncachable, count=1 -Some cards (especially Voodoo Graphics boards) need this 4 kB area +Some cards (especially Voodoo Graphics boards) need this 4 kB area excluded from the beginning of the region because it is used for registers. diff --git a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt index 17965f927c15..c93ff5f4c0dd 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt @@ -14,6 +14,10 @@ PAT allows for different types of memory attributes. The most commonly used ones that will be supported at this time are Write-back, Uncached, Write-combined and Uncached Minus. + +PAT APIs +-------- + There are many different APIs in the kernel that allows setting of memory attributes at the page level. In order to avoid aliasing, these interfaces should be used thoughtfully. Below is a table of interfaces available, @@ -26,38 +30,38 @@ address range to avoid any aliasing. API | RAM | ACPI,... | Reserved/Holes | -----------------------|----------|------------|------------------| | | | | -ioremap | -- | UC | UC | +ioremap | -- | UC- | UC- | | | | | ioremap_cache | -- | WB | WB | | | | | -ioremap_nocache | -- | UC | UC | +ioremap_nocache | -- | UC- | UC- | | | | | ioremap_wc | -- | -- | WC | | | | | -set_memory_uc | UC | -- | -- | +set_memory_uc | UC- | -- | -- | set_memory_wb | | | | | | | | set_memory_wc | WC | -- | -- | set_memory_wb | | | | | | | | -pci sysfs resource | -- | -- | UC | +pci sysfs resource | -- | -- | UC- | | | | | pci sysfs resource_wc | -- | -- | WC | is IORESOURCE_PREFETCH| | | | | | | | -pci proc | -- | -- | UC | +pci proc | -- | -- | UC- | !PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE | | | | | | | | pci proc | -- | -- | WC | PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE | | | | | | | | -/dev/mem | -- | UC | UC | +/dev/mem | -- | WB/WC/UC- | WB/WC/UC- | read-write | | | | | | | | -/dev/mem | -- | UC | UC | +/dev/mem | -- | UC- | UC- | mmap SYNC flag | | | | | | | | -/dev/mem | -- | WB/WC/UC | WB/WC/UC | +/dev/mem | -- | WB/WC/UC- | WB/WC/UC- | mmap !SYNC flag | |(from exist-| (from exist- | and | | ing alias)| ing alias) | any alias to this area| | | | @@ -68,7 +72,7 @@ pci proc | -- | -- | WC | and | | | | MTRR says WB | | | | | | | | -/dev/mem | -- | -- | UC_MINUS | +/dev/mem | -- | -- | UC- | mmap !SYNC flag | | | | no alias to this area | | | | and | | | | @@ -98,3 +102,35 @@ types. Drivers should use set_memory_[uc|wc] to set access type for RAM ranges. + +PAT debugging +------------- + +With CONFIG_DEBUG_FS enabled, PAT memtype list can be examined by + +# mount -t debugfs debugfs /sys/kernel/debug +# cat /sys/kernel/debug/x86/pat_memtype_list +PAT memtype list: +uncached-minus @ 0x7fadf000-0x7fae0000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb19000-0x7fb1a000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1a000-0x7fb1b000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1b000-0x7fb1c000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1c000-0x7fb1d000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1d000-0x7fb1e000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1e000-0x7fb25000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb25000-0x7fb26000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb26000-0x7fb27000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb27000-0x7fb28000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb28000-0x7fb2e000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2e000-0x7fb2f000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2f000-0x7fb30000 +uncached-minus @ 0x7fb31000-0x7fb32000 +uncached-minus @ 0x80000000-0x90000000 + +This list shows physical address ranges and various PAT settings used to +access those physical address ranges. + +Another, more verbose way of getting PAT related debug messages is with +"debugpat" boot parameter. With this parameter, various debug messages are +printed to dmesg log. + diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt b/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt index 1894cdfc69d9..1894cdfc69d9 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt index b0c7b6c4abda..72ffb5373ec7 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt @@ -54,10 +54,6 @@ APICs apicmaintimer. Useful when your PIT timer is totally broken. - disable_8254_timer / enable_8254_timer - Enable interrupt 0 timer routing over the 8254 in addition to over - the IO-APIC. The kernel tries to set a sensible default. - Early Console syntax: earlyprintk=vga diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt index 169ad423a3d1..169ad423a3d1 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt |